Home

Avaya BayRS Version 15.6.0.0 (314470-15.6 Rev 00) User's Manual

Contents

1. For additional information about ICMP SNMP and Telnet tagging see DSCP Tagging of ICMP SNMP and Telnet Packets on page 6 7 Note The Timely category in Table 6 2 is redundant because all packets have a default DSCP value of CSO However it is included in the table to indicate which protocols receive best effort treatment Packets from all network protocols that are not included in the first three traffic categories in the table Critical Control Network Control and Responsive are directed to the best effort queue which corresponds to the Standard service class 6 6 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Differentiated Services DSCP Tagging of ICMP SNMP and Telnet Packets This section supplements the information provided in Table 6 2 The BayRS router tags ICMP SNMP and Telnet packets differently depending on whether the router initiates the ICMP SNMP or Telnet session or whether the router is responding to packets sent to it e When the router initiates an ICMP SNMP or Telnet connection it tags the packets with the DSCP specified for each protocol in Table 6 2 e When the router responds to incoming ICMP SNMP and Telnet packets it copies the DSCP from the incoming packets into the outgoing ICMP SNMP and Telnet response packets Note If the DSCP of the incoming ICMP or SNMP packet is best effort the router sets the DSCP to the same value as for a router originated ICMP
2. Name Compress Decompress In Out Agg In Agg Out TX RX GRE1 4 222 4 006 202772 48017 21140 84692 0 GRE2 22 4 006 0 O 21140 84692 0 Hi fn LZS Compression for BN Routers with FRE 4 PPC Modules To support IP payload compression BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 adds Hi fn LZS compression capability to the FRE 4 PPC module installed in a BN router You must separately purchase a license for the Hi fn LZS compression software which is delivered on a separate CD by Nortel Networks This section supplements the CD insert that accompanies the Hi fn LZS Compression Option CD it provides instructions for copying the new hifn ppc file from the Hi fn CD to the BN router image Note This information applies to BayRS Version 15 6 only If you are gt installing the Hi fn software on a router other than a BN or on a BN that has no FRE 4 PPC module you do not need to read this section To install the Hi fn LZS compression software on a BN router with a FRE 4 PPC module 1 From the Site Manager main window choose Tools gt Image Builder to start the Image Builder Note For complete information about the Image Builder and the Router Files Manager see Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager 314470 15 6 Rev 00 5 7 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice 10 11 12 In the Image Builder window choose File gt Open and navigate to the copy of the current BN router image bn exe o
3. SEE T EEE E eaten E A 58 PPP Interface Parameters ree E E E E E hcineden elias A 59 PPP Multilink Multiclass Classes Parameter ccccccccccccssssssssseeeeeeeeesesessssssteeeeees A 6O PPP Line Parameter ccopueu sink E E bain E E ET T DRE paia A 61 QLLC Mapping Table Configuration Parameter prii eee sreaveeaiune rere A 61 RADIUS Access Control Parameters ccccccscccscceccesecesssssesssaeeeeeeeeeeeeesseesessssaseeeeees A 62 RADIUS Client Parameters oeiia piinia od isan beane eee aided A 63 RIP FAAEE sts enti ei tele ee VRRP Weg ane aoa tees halt es acted eatin Sd EASE AARE E ea pane E ARE A 65 X 25 Network Service Record Parameter E T E T sheeategene aaiae A 66 Index 314470 15 6 Rev 00 xiii Preface BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 is a software release that includes bug fixes and new features added since BayRS Version 15 5 0 0 This document change notice contains additions and amendments to the following BayRS publications since Version 15 1 0 0 BayRS Online Library Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager Configuring ATM Services Configuring Bridging Services Configuring Data Compression Services Configuring Differentiated Services Configuring DLSw Services Configuring Ethernet FDDI and Token Ring Services Configuring Frame Relay Services Configuring GRE NAT RIPSO and BFE Services Configuring IP ARP RARP RIP and OSPF Servic
4. 10 Choose Edit Circuits The Circuit List window opens continued 8 4 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Ethernet FDDI and Token Ring Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 11 Select the 802 1Q tagged circuit Note that 802 1Q tagged circuits are displayed with a Vn extension 12 Click on Edit The Circuit Definition window opens 13 Choose Protocols 14 Choose Add Delete The Select Protocols window opens 15 Select IP and click on OK The IP Configuration window opens 16 Enter an IP address and subnet mask and The Circuit Definition window opens click on OK 17 Choose File 18 Choose Exit The Circuit List window opens 19 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Adding a Tagged Circuit to an Existing 10BASE T or 100BASE T Interface To add an 802 1Q tagged circuit to an existing 1OBASE T or 1OOBASE T interface complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Edit Connector window opens click on a 10BASE T or 100BASE T connector 2 Click on Edit Circuit The Circuit Definition window opens 3 Choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 4 Choose Add Delete The Select Protocols window opens 5 Choose VLAN then click on OK The Edit VLAN Interface Parameters window opens 6 Click on
5. 4 Choose Global The PIM Global Configuration window opens Set the Source Specific Multicast parameter to Enable Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 53 If you plan to run PIM SSM only disable the following parameters e Candidate BSR e Candidate RP If you plan to run both PIM SM and PIM SSM do not delete the BSR and RP When you disable these parameters all related BSR and RP parameters are grayed out Click on OK You return to the Configuration Manager window 13 8 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring IP Multicasting and Multimedia Services Customizing IGMP Version 3 and PIM SSM When you configure IGMP Version 3 and PIM SSM on the router the protocols are automatically enabled with default values for most parameters You can customize IGMP and PIM SSM as described in this section Topic Page Disabling and Reenabling PIM SSM 13 9 Configuring Equal Cost Multipath Support for PIM SSM 13 10 Configuring PIM SSM Address Ranges 13 12 Editing IGMP Interface Fine tuning Parameters 13 13 Note This section describes how to customize parameters that are specific to IGMP Version 3 and PIM SSM For information about customizing other IGMP and PIM parameters see Configuring IP Multicasting and Multimedia Services part number 308629 15 1 Rev 00 Disabling and Reenabling PIM SSM To disable and reenable PIM SSM on the
6. Enable Disable Configuration Manager gt ATM1 gt Physical Layer Configuration gt DS3 or E3 Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables this interface Set to Disable only if you want to disable the interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 26 10 1 2 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 7 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Line Type Configuration Manager gt ATM1 gt Physical Layer Configuration gt DS3 or E3 Autodetect For DS3 the options are DS3 M23 DS3 CBIT Parity Autodetect For E3 the options are E3 Framed E3 PLCP Sets the frame format for this interface Determines the framing mode for this interface For DS3 if you choose DS3 M23 or DS3 CBIT Parity be sure that the ATM line attribute Framing Mode is appropriately set If the Line Type is DS3 M23 Framing Mode should be DS3_M23 or T3M23PLCP If Line Type is DS3 CBIT Parity Framing Mode should be DS3_CBIT or T3CBITPLCP For E3 make sure that the ATM line attribute Framing Mode is set to either E3_G751 or E3_G832 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 26 10 1 7 Setup Alarm Threshold seconds Configuration Manager gt ATM1 gt Physical Layer Configuration gt DS3 or E3 2 2 to 10 Sets the time interval in seconds during which the device driver tolerates a performance defect or anomaly If the pe
7. Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID You use the following parameters to configure traffic shaping on a frame relay PVC Committed Burst Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt Frame Relay gt Services gt PVCs 0 0 to 2147483647 bits The maximum number of bits that a VC can transmit during the VC s burst period Tc when congestion is occurring To enable traffic shaping this parameter and the Throughput parameter CIR must both be greater than zero The Committed Burst Bc value should be lower than the Throughput Enter a value within the given range You should set this parameter to 1 4 of the CIR unless this VC is sending frames larger than that size If the VC is sending large frames increase the value of this parameter to accommodate the size of those frames 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 2 1 16 Excess Burst Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt Frame Relay gt Services gt PVCs 0 0 to 2147483647 bits This value is added to the Committed Burst value to determine the maximum number of bits that may be transmitted during the VC s burst period when there is no congestion The Excess Burst plus the Committed Burst must be less than or equal to the line speed Enter a value within the given range 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 2 1 17 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 27 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Parameter Path De
8. Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Interface Query Rate Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Interfaces 125 0 to 4096 seconds Specifies how often the router sends group membership queries on the interface If the interface is running IGMP Version 3 this parameter specifies the interval between general queries Setting this parameter to a larger value causes queries to be sent less often If there are no multicast hosts on this circuit set the parameter to 0 to disable queries Specifying 0 affects queries only the router still forwards multicast datagrams on this circuit If another IGMP router on this network has assumed the query role this router will not send queries unless it has not heard any queries within a specific number of seconds calculated by the router The maximum value 4096 seconds is equal to 1 hour 8 minutes and 16 seconds 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 13 2 1 5 Net Version Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Interfaces IGMPV2 IGMPV2 IGMPV3 Specifies the version of IGMP that the interface is running Specify the IGMP version that the network attached to this interface is running 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 13 2 1 14 A 40 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter
9. Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Data Path Notify Timeout Configuration Manager gt ATM1 gt ATM Line Attributes 1 0 to 3600 Specifies the time in seconds that the router waits before disabling the data path interface when you disconnect the cable from the ATM module providing that you set the Data Path Enable parameter to Enable Accept the default or enter an appropriate value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 3 2 1 12 Framing Mode Configuration Manager gt ATM1 gt ATM Line Attributes DS3_CBIT for DS3 lines E3_G832 for E3 lines T1ADM for DS1 lines E1ADM for E1 lines DS3_CBIT DS3_M32 T3CBITTPLCP T3M23PLCP E3_G751 E3_G832 Specifies the transceiver mode for the physical interface Select a transceiver mode as follows e DS3_CBIT DS3_M32 T3CBITTPLCP or T3M23PLCP for DS3 modules E3_G751 or E3_G832 for E3 modules 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 3 2 1 17 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 5 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Parameter Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Cell Scrambling Passport 5430 DS3 E3 Scrambling BN Configuration Manager gt ATM1 gt ATM Line Attributes Off On Off If you select On the router randomizes cell payload sufficiently to guarantee cell synchronization If you select Off cell synchronization probl
10. Prior to Version 15 5 0 0 only Site Manager could be used to configure DLSw protocol prioritization The following sections explain how to use the BCC to configure this feature For general information on DLSw protocol prioritization and for information on using Site Manager to configure it see Configuring DLSw Services 314470 15 6 Rev 00 7 1 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Configuring DLSw Protocol Prioritization using the BCC Note This section assumes that DLSw is already configured on an interface and that the peer table is complete For information about configuring a circuit with DLSw and setting the slot peer and SAP parameters refer to Configuring DLSw Services There are three parts to configuring DLSw protocol prioritization using the BCC e Configuring and enabling global parameters for DLSw protocol prioritization e Customizing and enabling DLSw priority queues for specific DLSw peers e Creating and enabling priority outbound filters for DLSw traffic Configuring and Enabling Global Parameters for DLSw Protocol Prioritization DLSw protocol prioritization is disabled by default When you enable it it takes effect using the currently configured values default or customized for all global DLSw protocol prioritization parameters You can customize the DLSw protocol prioritization configuration to meet the specific needs of your site by changing the default settings of the global DLSw protocol
11. cir 5000 committed burst 1250 excess burst 1000 frf12 fragmentation enable enabled frf12 fragmentation trigger size 100 box box serial 3 1 dsqms dsqms serial 3 1 S31 info debug level none dequeue at line rate disabled frf12 frag interleaving enable disabled frf12 nonpriority high water mark 3 frf12 priority fragment weight 1 restart notset state enabled dsqms serial 3 1 S31 frf12 frag interleaving enable enabled dsqms serial 3 1 S31 frf12 nonpriority high water mark 5 dsgqms serial 3 1 S31 frf12 priority fragment weight 2 dsqms serial 3 1 S31 Using Site Manager To configure FRF 12 fragmentation and interleaving on the router complete the tasks in this section It is assumed that the frame relay interface and PVCs have already been configured 314470 15 6 Rev 00 9 23 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Enabling DSQMS on the Frame Relay Interface If DSQMS is already enabled on the frame relay interface where you will configure FRF 12 go to the next section Configuring Traffic Shaping on the Frame Relay PVCs on page 9 25 Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on a port configured for frame relay The Edit Connector window opens Click on Edit Circuit The Frame Relay Circuit Definition window opens Click on Services The Frame Relay Service List window opens Select the default s
12. e The BayRS implementation of IP payload compression operates only between two BayRS routers over a GRE tunnel e You cannot configure both IP payload compression Layer 3 and PPP or frame relay compression Layer 2 on the same interface 314470 15 6 Rev 00 5 3 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice e IP payload compression is not supported with IPsec IKE e Small packets may not compress well Packets smaller than 90 bytes are sent uncompressed e If packet fragmentation is also configured compression of outbound IP packets is performed before packet fragmentation e Certain packet filters that are based on Layer 4 information may not work with IP payload compression To implement IP payload compression you must do the following Figure 5 1 1 Configure a GRE tunnel between two Nortel Networks routers 2 Add a logical IP interface to the local and remote tunnel end points 3 Enable IP payload compression on each logical IP interface Local logical Remote logical host interface host interface a Compression Compression Decompression Decompression va MPLS N Router ae I GRE tunnel 1 Fa Local physical Remote physical router interface router interface IP0095A Figure 5 1 Implementation of IP Payload Compression 5 4 314470 15 6
13. 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 3 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Interface MTU Configuration Manager gt ATM1 gt ATM Line Attributes 4608 0 to 9188 Specifies the largest packet size in octets that the router can transmit on this interface Enter a value that is appropriate for the network 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 3 2 1 9 Data Path Enable Configuration Manager gt ATM1 gt ATM Line Attributes Enable Enable Disable Specifies whether the router disables the interface between the driver and the higher level software the data path interface when you disconnect the cable from the ATM module If you select Enable then when you disconnect the cable from the ATM module the router disables the data path interface after the time you specify with the Data Path Notify Timeout parameter If you select Disable the router does not disable the data path interface when you disconnect the cable from the ATM module Select Enable or Disable If you select Enable be sure to enter an appropriate value for the Data Path Notify Timeout parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 3 2 1 11 A 4 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default
14. BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice For example to process packets that match the filter criteria and ranges but do not reset the inactivity timer enter the following command actions ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 no reset on actions ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 Specifying User Defined Criteria You can specify user defined criteria in IP outbound traffic filters by specifying an offset and length based on the reference fields in the IP header To specify user defined criteria navigate to the match prompt for example box serial 3 1 protocol priority ip outbound filter lt filter_name gt match ip ip and enter user defined reference lt value gt offset lt va ue gt bitwidth lt value gt range lt value gt reference is a known bit position in the packet header Valid values are ip wan header start ip wan header end x25 mac start x25 snap start x25 nlpid start x25 nlpdu start offset specifies the first position of the filtered bit pattern in relation to the reference point measured in bits bitwidth specifies the total bit length that matches the packet criteria range specifies a minimum and maximum target value to apply to the match criterion For a single value you must specify the minimum value in hexadecimal format You can precede the value with Ox Example This example specifies user defined criteria to create an IP traffic filter that drops every packet that has a
15. Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Max Host Response Time Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Interfaces 100 1 to 100 tenths of a second Specifies in tenths of a second the maximum amount of time that a host must wait before responding to a query IGMP places this value in the code field of an IGMP query This value must be smaller than the value specified by the Interface Query Rate parameter Using this parameter you can tune the burstiness of IGMP message traffic on the network larger values cause host responses to be spread out over a larger interval Specify a maximum response time for this interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 13 2 1 15 Mtrace Entry Lifetime Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Interfaces 30 30 to 8192 seconds Specifies in seconds the amount of time that a router should keep a forwarding cache entry that was created specifically for Mtrace Specify an Mtrace lifetime value for the interface The maximum value 8192 seconds is equal to 2 hours 16 minutes and 32 seconds 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 13 2 1 18 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 41 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Query Suppression Configuration Manager g
16. Use the following guidelines to configure the Multilink Multiclass PPP Classes parameter In the path name given bold text indicates that you access the PPP Multiclass Classes window by clicking on the Classes button on the PPP Interface List window Fragment Size Protocols gt PPP gt Interfaces gt Classes 80 A value from 64 up to the maximum transmission unit for the circuit Specifies the minimum size of a packet that Multilink will fragment for this class This parameter is active only for Multilink Multiclass Accept the default value or specify the required minimum packet size 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 6 1 3 A 60 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters PPP Line Parameter Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Use the following guidelines to configure the PPP Line parameter associated with the RFC 2686 Multi Class Extension to Multi Link PPP feature for BayRS In the path name given bold text indicates that you access the PPP Line Lists window by clicking on the Lines button on the PPP Interface Lists window For information about configuring other PPP line parameters see Configuring PPP Services Multilink Multiclass for Dialup Protocols gt PPP gt Interfaces gt Lines Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables multilink multiclass RFC 2686 for this line This parameter is active only for multilink on dial up connections and applies only to
17. A 53 equal cost multipath ECMP enabling for PIM SSM 13 10 Estimated Groups parameter IGMP global A 36 Excess Burst parameter frame relay PVC A 27 Index 2 F Forward Cache Limit parameter IGMP global A 37 Fragment Size parameter PPP multilink multiclass A 60 frame relay FRF 12 9 15 FRF 9 9 9 traffic shaping with DSQMS 9 5 Frame Relay PVC parameter descriptions A 27 frame relay PVCs enabling traffic shaping on 9 1 9 5 9 25 Frame Relay Service Record parameter description A 31 Frame Relay SVC parameter descriptions A 32 FRE 4 PPC modules for BN router adding Hi fn LZS compression 5 7 FRF 12 parameters DSQMS interface A 18 PVC A 30 FRF 12 configuring on frame relay 9 15 FRE 9 parameters PVCs A 29 SVCs A 32 FRE 9 configuring on frame relay 9 9 From BGP Peer parameter OSPF or RIP announce policy A 52 G GRE configuring keepalive messages 10 1 enabling and disabling keepalive messages 10 2 setting the keepalive messages retries parameter 10 5 setting the keepalive messages timer 10 3 GRE remote connection parameter descriptions A 33 GRE show commands show gre logical ip tunnels 20 2 show gre logical ipx tunnels 20 3 show gre physical tunnels 20 4 GRE tunnels configuring IP payload compression on 5 2 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Groups parameter IGMP static forwarding policies A 46 H Hi fn LZS compression for BN FRE 4 PPC modules 5 7 for Passport 2430 and Passport 5
18. Configuring Data Compression Services Hi fn LZS Compression for Passport 2430 and Passport 5430 Beginning with Version 15 5 0 0 BayRS adds Hi fn LZS Lempel Ziv STAC compression capability to the Passport 2430 and Passport 5430 thus extending optional Hi fn LZS compression capability to all BayRS router platforms The use of Hi fn compression improves the bandwidth utilization of a wide area network WAN link by removing redundancies in data traffic which increases the effective throughput of the link Hi fn compression is standards based and permits interoperability with third party routers For information about configuring Hi fn LZS compression see Configuring Data Compression Services 314470 15 6 Rev 00 5 1 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Version 15 6 0 0 The following information supplements Chapter 1 Starting Compression Services in Configuring Data Compression Services IP Payload Compression over GRE Tunnels Before Version 15 6 BayRS implemented software based data compression that compresses the entire IP packet for transmission over PPP frame relay and X 25 networks As service providers increasingly adopt IP MPLS topologies the IP header of the packet must be left uncompressed to route packets around the IP MPLS core IP payload compression provides a means for compressing only the data that follows the IP header IP payload compression provides Layer 3 compression end to end o
19. Diag_PROM_source_file is the name of the diagnostic PROM source file for example frediag exe 21 6 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Upgrading Routers to BayRS Version 15 x slot_ID is the slot location of the diagnostic PROM that you want to update For AN ANH ARN and Passport 2430 routers the s ot_ D is always 1 For example enter the following command prom w 2 frediag exe 3 This command erases the diagnostic PROM image on slot 3 and copies the contents of the frediag exe file on volume 2 to the PROM on slot 3 Upgrade PROMs on multiple slots on your router If you need to update PROM images on multiple slots use a dash to indicate a range of slots 2 5 or use commas or spaces to separate multiple slot locations 2 3 5 or 23 5 For example enter the following command prom w 2 frediag exe 2 3 5 This command erases the diagnostic PROM images on slots 2 3 and 5 and copies the contents of the frediag exe file on volume 2 to the PROMs on slots 2 3 and 5 Verify the PROM upgrade by entering the following command prom v lt volume_no gt lt PROM_source_file gt lt slot_ID gt For example for a boot PROM enter prom v 1 arnboot exe 1 For a diagnostic PROM enter prom v 1 arndiag exe 1 The system verifies that the PROM image on a designated flash volume that is the image file used as a source for upgrading the PROM matches the image actually stored in the boot or diagnostic PROM on the designated sl
20. IP OSPF Maximum Path parameter IP Global A 48 IP payload compression configuring 5 5 displaying statistics for 5 6 implementation notes 5 3 overview 5 2 IP Payload Compression parameter 5 6 IP Payload Compression parameter description IP interface A 50 ISDN PRI filtering actions 16 23 J Join Ack Enable parameter IGMP global A 37 K Keepalive parameter GRE remote tunnel end point 10 3 Keepalive Retries parameter GRE remote tunnel end point 10 6 Keepalive Retry Timeout parameter GRE remote tunnel end point 10 5 L Last Member Query Count parameter IGMP interface A 45 Last Member Query Interval parameter IGMP interface A 44 login accounting for console and Telnet 15 4 LQM link quality monitoring PPP configuring on HSSI 14 9 Index 3 LQR link quality reporting PPP configuring on HSSI 14 9 Max Host Response Time parameter IGMP interface A 41 Maximum Number of Classes parameter PPP interface A 60 MIB object ID using A 3 MIB object IDs for IP 11 4 Mtrace Entry Lifetime parameter IGMP interface A 41 MTU defining for ATM E3 interface 3 4 Multilink Multiclass Enable parameter PPP interface A 59 Multilink Multiclass for Dialup parameter PPP multilink multiclass A 61 Multiple Nexthop Calculation Method parameter IP global A 49 N NAT global parameter description A 50 Net Version parameter IGMP interface A 40 network
21. Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID You use the following parameters to designate static rendezvous point RP routers for use with PIM SM RP Address Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt PIM gt Static RP Null IP address Specifies the IP address of a statically configured RP router PIM uses this IP address to map a group to the RP Specify the IP address for the RP in dotted decimal notation 99999 666 4 Group Address Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt PIM gt Static RP Null Multicast IP address Specifies the IP address of the multicast group PIM maps the configured group to the RP address Specify the multicast group address in dotted decimal notation 99999 666 5 Prefix Length Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt PIM gt Static RP None 4 through 32 Specifies the prefix length for the specified multicast group address Specify a prefix length from 4 through 32 99999 666 6 A 58 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Priority Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt PIM gt Static RP None O through 255 Specifies the priority for the static RP PIM elects a
22. The Edit RED Parameters window opens edit 5 Edit one or more of the following parameters e Second Order Const e First Order Const e Min Threshold e Max Threshold Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 14 6 Click on Apply then click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 6 18 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Differentiated Services Modifying DSQMS Interface Parameters You can modify DSQMS parameters for an interface To edit DSQMS interface parameters perform the following steps Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Protocols menu opens choose Protocols 2 Choose DSQMS The DSQMS menu opens 3 Choose Interface The Edit DSQMS Parameters window opens 4 Select the interface that you want to edit Edit one or more of the following parameters e Enable e Debug Level e Dequeue At Line Rate Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 16 6 Click on Apply 7 Click on Restart When you edit parameters for a DSQMS interface you must restart DSQMS on the interface for the changes to take effect 8 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 314470 15 6 Rev 00 6 19 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Modifying DSQMS Queues You can modify DSQMS queues on an interface To
23. The IP menu opens 3 Choose PIM The PIM menu opens 4 Choose Static RP The IP Static RP List window opens 5 Click on Add The PIM Static RP window opens 6 Set the following parameters e RP Address e Group Address e Prefix Length e Priority Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 58 7 Click on OK You return to the IP Static RP List window 8 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 314470 15 6 Rev 00 13 17 Chapter 14 Configuring PPP Services Version 15 5 0 0 The following section is new to Chapter 3 Customizing PPP Services in Configuring PPP Services 308639 14 00 Rev 00 Multi Class Extension to Multi Link PPP Beginning with Version 15 5 0 0 BayRS supports RFC 2686 Multi Class Extension to Multi Link PPP This feature provides a Layer 2 fragmentation and interleaving solution for Point to Point Protocol PPP wide area networks WANs that ensures high voice quality for voice over IP VoIP packets transmitted with data packets over a WAN When this feature is enabled large data packets are fragmented into smaller packets and higher priority voice packets are sent between interleaved with the data packet fragments Multiclass extension MCE to multilink PPP MLPPP is a QoS enhancement for bandwidth limited PPP connections link speeds less than T1 speeds Utilization of this feature minimizes the serialization delay and delay
24. but ECMP for PIM SSM always uses the source destination hash algorithm based on the source and destination address IP forwards all packets with a given source and destination address to the same next hop If you select multicast only distribution ECMP is disabled for unicast forwarding and the configured equal cost paths are used for PIM SSM forwarding only Note The Multicast Only setting for the IP global parameter Multiple Nexthop Calculation Method applies only to PIM SSM not to PIM SM DVMRP or MOSPF For more information about ECMP see Configuring IP ARP RARP RIP and OSPF Services 13 10 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring IP Multicasting and Multimedia Services To enable or disable equal cost multipath support for PIM SSM complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols Choose IP The Protocols menu opens The IP menu opens 3 Choose Global The Edit IP Global Parameters window opens 4 Set the Multiple Nexthop Calculation Method parameter to any value other than None Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 49 5 Click on OK You return to the Configuration Manager window 6 In the Configuration Manager window The Protocols menu opens choose Protocols 7 Choose IP The IP menu opens 8 Choose PIM The PIM menu opens 9 Ch
25. incoming calls To activate multilink multiclass on this dialup line set this parameter to Enable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 1 1 51 QLLC Mapping Table Configuration Parameter Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID You use the following parameter to enable or disable the XID Retry feature XID Retry Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt X 25 Protocol gt Service gt QLLC Disable Enable Disable Allows the QLLC service to retransmit the XID3 every 10 seconds to the QLLC endstation until it receives a response This ensures that the endstation will receive the XID3 and establish a connection Set this parameter to Enable to have QLLC retransmit the XID3 every 10 seconds 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 4 8 1 19 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 61 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice RADIUS Access Control Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID You use the following parameters to modify router access User Manager Lock Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt Global Protocols gt RADIUS gt Access Control Disabled Enable Disable Allows you to modify access to the router by enabling or disabling the user manager lock Set to Enable to lock out the user and manager profile and allow access only
26. protocol priority and enter dequeue at line rate disabled enabled When limited bandwidth is available select enabled to reduce delay in queues that need a constant delay rate such as Voice over IP Accept the default disabled if you do not need constant bandwidth for traffic that requires a constant delay rate For example the following command enabled the dequeue at line rate feature protocol priority ethernet 2 1 dequeue at line rate enabled protocol priority ethernet 2 1 Creating Outbound Traffic Filters You can create outbound traffic filters for the following interfaces Ethernet 10Base T or 1OOBASE T FDDI token ring HSSI MCE1 MCT1 and synchronous The current implementation of this feature supports only traffic with IP headers The following section describes how to create an IP routed outbound traffic filter for an interface 16 8 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization To create outbound traffic filters use the following procedures Procedure Page Creating a Filter for P Routed Packets 16 9 Displaying Priority Outbound Filter Parameter Values 16 9 Enabling or Disabling the Outbound Filter 16 10 Specifying Match Criteria for P to IP Outbound Traffic Filters 16 10 Specifying Match Criteria for IP to Source Routing Outbound Traffic Filters 16 17 Specifying Match Criteria for IP to PPP Outbound Tra
27. 0 0 New Technician Interface Script To support this QoS enhancement a new Technician Interface script file called pvc_stats bat is now available Like the BCC show frame relay stats shaping dsqms queues command this script provides DSQMS statistics at the frame relay PVC level The syntax of this script is as follows show pvc_stats dlci lt d ci gt circuit lt circuit gt New MIB for Monitoring DSQMS at the PVC Level You can also monitor DSQMS traffic statistics at the frame relay PVC level using anew MIB called wfFrVCStatsEntry This transient statistics MIB record is only present when frame relay traffic shaping functionality uses DSQMS 9 8 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Frame Relay Services Configuring FRF 9 Compression Before Version 15 6 0 0 frame relay data compression was performed by the proprietary Nortel Networks compression protocol WCP WCP provides superior performance for BayRS routers but it does not interoperate with other vendors equipment With Version 15 6 0 0 BayRS also supports frame relay data compression as per FRF 9 to allow interoperation with other equipment FRE 9 is a frame relay standard for data compression on virtual connections FRE 9 improves bandwidth utilization on frame relay links and unlike WCP supports interoperability with other vendors equipment BayRS supports FRE 9 end to end that is from data termination equipment DTE to DTE over a frame relay core n
28. 0 0 Document Change Notice net modules ture support Diagnos Diagnostic tic PROM Reason for Boot PROM Router PROM Revision Upgrading Boot PROM Revision Platform File Name Number PROM File Name Number ASN asndiag exe 2 36 Strata flash fea asnboot exe 13 00 ture support asndiag rom 2 36 Not applicable BN frediag exe 5 16 Strata flash fea freboot exe 13 00 ture support fre4diag ppc 1 14 FRE 4 board fre4boot ppc 13 20 support ARE BN 5782 MPE arediag ppc 1 22 Strata flash fea areboot ppc 14 0 1 0 ture support Passport 2430 pp2480diag exe 2 06 Not applicable pp2430boot ppc 15 4 0 0 pp2430ram exe 2 06 Not applicable pp2430diag a 2 06 Not applicable Passport 5430 pp5430diag exe 1 16 Not applicable pp5430boot ppc 15 4 2 0 pp5430ram exe 1 16 Not applicable pp5430diag a 1 16 DS3 E3 feature support and quad serial feature support System 5000 s5000diag exe 0 04 Strata flash fea s5000boot exe 13 00 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Upgrading Routers to BayRS Version 15 x Version 15 3 0 0 The following section describes changes to Upgrading Routers to BayRS Version 15 x Site Manager Upgrade Prerequisites Before you upgrade to Site Manager Version 15 x review Site Manager system requirements Reviewing Site Manager System Requirements Site Manager is a graphical user interface GUI for router configuration and management over an IP network To r
29. 00 Configuring Ethernet FDDI and Token Ring Services Version 15 5 0 0 The following implementation note is being added to the BayRS Version 15 5 0 0 Documentation Change Notice since it became available after publication of the 15 4 0 0 documentation Implementation Note for the ARN Router When you configure VLAN tagging on an ARN 10MB Ethernet Base Module the MTU for the Ethernet interface is set to 1518 bytes for the packets on this line Although the ARN 10MB Ethernet Base Module supports tagged packets it does not support 802 1Q tagged frames that are larger than 1518 bytes 1514 bytes plus the 4 byte tag However there are other Ethernet interfaces such as the Ethernet and Tri Serial Expansion Module and the 10 100 TX UTP Base Module that have an MTU of 1522 bytes and consequently do support the maximum size tagged packet 1518 bytes plus the 4 byte tag Because of differences in the MTU size supported when you configure VLAN tagging on an ARN 10MB Ethernet Base Module you must make sure that no other tagged hosts on the LAN that are attached to the 1OBT motherboard Ethernet port have MTUs greater than 1518 bytes If they do you must reset their respective MTUs to 1518 bytes so that they can interoperate properly with the ARN 10MB Ethernet Base Module 314470 15 6 Rev 00 8 7 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Version 15 6 0 0 The following section supplements the information in Chapter 5
30. 1 S31 frf12 nonpriority high water mark lt integer gt integer is a value from 1 through 64 DSQMS stops dequeuing packets when the value specified by this parameter is reached if it does not find any voice packets to interleave with the data packet fragments 4 If necessary change the number of voice packets to interleave between data packet fragments The default value is 1 dsqms serial 3 1 S31 frf12 priority fragment weight lt nteger gt integer is a value from 1 through 64 Configuration Example Using the BCC Following is an extended example of using the BCC to configure all FRF 12 fragmentation and interleaving parameters box serial 3 1 serial 3 1 dsqms dsqms serial 3 1 S31 back serial 3 1 frame relay frame relay 3 1 service boston service boston pve 33 pvc 3 1 33 info cir 0 clear high water 0 committed burst 0 congestion control inherit congestion counter 20 9 22 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Frame Relay Services congestion method inherit congestion timer 1 dlci 33 excess burst 0 frf12 fragmentation enable enabled frf12 fragmentation trigger size 100 frf9 control enabled frf 9 min compress size 0 high queue limit inherit low queue limit inherit multicast control disabled normal queue limit inherit primary ignore status timer 30 startup delay timer disabled vc state active wcp control disabled pvc 3 1 33 pvc 3 1 33 pvc 3 1 33 pvc 3 1 33 pvc 3 1 33 pvc 3 1 33
31. 192 168 1 1 protocol priority enabled dlsw peer queue configuration 192 168 1 1 To disable the customized DLSw priority queues for a specific peer again navigate to the peer s dlsw peer queue configuration prompt for example box disw disw peer queue configuration lt peer P address gt and enter protocol priority disabled For example to disable the customized DLSw priority queues for a peer with an IP address of 192 168 1 1 navigate to the peer s dlsw peer queue configuration prompt and enter dlsw peer queue configuration 192 168 1 1 protocol priority disabled dlsw peer queue configuration 192 168 1 1 Creating and Enabling Priority Outbound Filters for DLSw traffic You can create priority filters for outbound DLSw traffic for specific peers that determine which traffic is sent to which DLSw priority queue 0 through 9 To create a DLSw priority filter for outbound traffic navigate to the global dlsw prompt for example box disw and enter disw priority outbound filter name lt filter_name gt peer ip addr lt value gt filter_name is a descriptive name of the outbound traffic filter you are creating For example use the name dsap_Oland02_q3 for a filter that sends traffic with a destination SAP address of 01 or 02 to queue 3 The filter name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters in length 7 8 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring DLSw Services value is the IP address of the peer for which you are cr
32. 4 Edit the PPP link quality monitoring and link quality reporting parameters as necessary For complete information about PPP LQM and LQR parameters see Configuring PPP Services Example The following example configures PPP LQM on the HSSI interface as follows e Enables link quality monitoring e Specifies that the remote peer should maintain the LQR timer default value e Specifies an LQR reporting period of 5 seconds e Sets the acceptable inbound success rate to 85 percent e Sets the acceptable outbound success rate to 95 percent hssi 3 1 ppp line line 3 1 link quality protocol linkqr line 3 1 peer lqr timer enabled line 3 1 lqr reporting period 5 line 3 1 lqr percentage received 85 line 3 1 lqr percentage sent 95 314470 15 6 Rev 00 14 11 Chapter 15 Configuring RADIUS Version 15 2 0 0 The following sections are amendments to Configuring RADIUS Topic Page Configuring a RADIUS Client Using Site Manager 15 1 Modifying Router Access Using the BCC or Site Manager 15 2 Using SecurlD for RADIUS Authentication 15 5 Configuring a RADIUS Client Using Site Manager With earlier versions of Site Manager you configured RADIUS only on link modules that had synchronous interfaces With Version 15 2 0 0 you can use Site Manager to configure RADIUS on any link module including Quad Ethernet FDDI and token ring Consequently Site Manager no longer automatically configures a demand c
33. BGP and EGP Version 15 5 0 0 The following section is an update to Chapter 1 Exterior Gateway Protocols BGP and EGP in Configuring IP Exterior Gateway Protocols BGP and EGP BGP Implementation Notes For BayRS Version 15 5 0 0 128 MB of optional memory is available for the Passport 5430 The standard 64 MB of memory on the Passport 5430 is no longer adequate to run the full complement of Internet routes which currently can be as many as 125 000 routes Therefore it is recommended that you upgrade to 128 MB of memory if you want to run full Internet routes on a Passport 5430 Because of this situation the following update to the BGP Implementation Notes is necessary To configure BGP and download full Internet routes on the Passport 5430 Multiservice Access Switch you must install the router with 128 MB of memory For additional information refer to the BGP Guidelines section of the Release Notes for BayRS Version 15 5 0 0 314470 15 6 Rev 00 12 1 Chapter 13 Configuring IP Multicasting and Multimedia Services Version 15 2 0 0 The following section is new to Configuring IP Multicasting and Multimedia Services part number 308629 15 1 Rev 00 Configuring a PIM Bootstrap Border Router You can define a router as a PIM bootstrap border router PBBR by specifying at least one of its interfaces as a PIM bootstrap border interface PBBI A bootstrap border router prevents a bootstrap message that is
34. BayRS Version 15 6 supports a new parameter called Optional Line Speed for frame relay service records the value that you set for this parameter is reported by the ifSpeed MIB variable In this way network management applications can use SNMP to obtain a user configured value for the ifSpeed variable for a virtual circuit and generate alarms as appropriate Note This new parameter applies to the service record only regardless of how many virtual circuits are configured under that service record 314470 15 6 Rev 00 9 3 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice By default the ifSpeed variable is set to the line speed of the interface You can set the optional line speed parameter to a value corresponding to the rate of the virtual circuit that value will be reflected in the corresponding ifSpeed entry for each VC on the service record Note The value that you set is for reporting purposes only it has no effect on the actual performance of the frame relay virtual circuit You can use the BCC or Site Manager to configure the optional line speed parameter on a service record Using the BCC To set a line speed value on a frame relay service record navigate to the service record prompt for example box serial 3 1 frame relay 3 1 service kiev and enter optional line speed lt integer gt integer is the line speed for the service record in bits per second For example the following command sets the line speed
35. Configuring 802 1Q Tagging in Configuring Ethernet FDDI and Token Ring Services part number 308623 15 0 Using the BCC to Configure 802 1Q Tagged Circuits Before Version 15 6 802 1Q tagged ports could only be configured using Site Manager With this release of BayRS you can now use the BCC to configure 802 1Q tagged ports Note The BayRS implementation of 802 1Q tagging has not changed for this release The only change is that you can now set the same MIB variables with the BCC as you could with Site Manager For complete information about the BayRS implementation of VLANs and 802 1Q tagging see Configuring Ethernet FDDI and Token Ring Services and the following sections in this chapter e Router Processing of Tagged Frames on page 8 2 e Implementation Considerations on page 8 2 e Implementation Note for the ARN Router on page 8 7 Adding a Tagged Circuit to a 10BASE T or 100BASE T Interface To add an 802 1Q tagged circuit to a 10BASE T or 1OOBASE T interface follow these steps 1 Navigate to the IOBASE T or 1OOBASE T interface where you will configure the VLAN box ethernet 2 1 ethernet 2 1 2 Create a VLAN by entering this command vlan vian name lt vian name gt global vlan id lt global vian ID gt protocol type lt protocol type gt Table 8 2 describes the parameters and values that you enter 8 8 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Ethernet FDDI and Token Ring
36. DSCP Tagging for Router Generated Packets on page 6 5 Although RFC 2686 provides the option of prefix elision the Nortel Networks implementation on BayRS routers does not support it This implementation also does not support DSQMS Differentiated Services Queue Management System on any interface on which this feature is enabled When utilizing this feature it is recommended that you make sure that VoIP packets are marked with the EF DiffServ code point for Premium service class Voice packets that are marked with the EF DiffServ code point will never be fragmented Note You must use Site Manager to configure the multilink multiclass PPP feature There is no BCC support for this feature 14 2 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring PPP Services Enabling and Disabling Multilink Multiclass on Interfaces You enable and disable multilink multiclass on interfaces by setting the Multilink MultiClass Enable parameter on the PPP Interface List window shown in Figure 14 1 E PPP Interface List X Done Lines Classes Delete Apply Values Help ENABLE Figure 14 1 Site Manager PPP Interface List Window 314470 15 6 Rev 00 14 3 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice To enable or disable multilink multiclass on interfaces using Site Manager perform the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window
37. DSQMS dequeues packets for the link it stops dequeuing when the number of packets specified by this parameter is reached if it does not find any intervening voice packets If you set this parameter to a low value link performance may be adversely affected Instructions Accept the default value 3 or enter a value from 1 through 64 MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 16 1 1 39 A 18 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter FRF 12 Priority Fragment Weight Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt DSQMS gt Interface Default 1 Options 1 through 64 Function Specifies the number of voice packets to be interleaved between data packet fragments when passing fragments to the link If you set this parameter to a higher value then more voice fragments are passed between data fragments Instructions Accept the default value 1 or enter a value from 1 through 64 MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 16 1 1 40 DSQMS Queue Parameters The Edit DSQMS Queue List window Figure A 3 contains parameters for a DSQMS queue configured on the physical interface mcd psams Queue tist Done Add Apply Delete Classifier Values v Help gt ENA BLE PRIORITY 6 ae i Figure A 3 Edit DSQMS Queue List Window 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 19 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Paramete
38. E ys 23 2 Setting Daylight Savings Time Using the Technician Interface pineieshints anie 23 2 Removing the Technician Interface Login Banner sessssrsesssrrreserrrressrrrnsererensess 23 3 Chapter 24 Using the Bay Command Console BCC E EE E a Ke ETE O T E E EN O N 24 1 Using the source Command to Configure a Router ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteneeeees 24 1 show hardware COmMant icin minucenieln ere PE 24 2 Contouring the BCC Inactivity TIMET scsi casaiduken aaa deea ee 24 4 Appendix A Site Manager Parameters Adacont Host Parenter ennn A 3 PA MRT gio Pamei S arpana aae Ei AA a EES ETA ENA OaE E A 3 ATM Port Parameters acess tec ds tied cscs sad vise dines cadenemesetaatee NEA ERNES sciatic tacos A 7 AIM Service Record Parameter nisrenninieniinneaiaeniirain deine BONO Automated Security Association IKE Parameters n cna A 11 xii 314470 15 6 Rev 00 BGP 3 Specific Announce Policy Parameter ccccccecseeeeseeeeeteeeeenaeeeeseeeeenaeeeeaes A 12 BGP 4 Specific Announce Policy Parameter E T ere Vaie Ai A 13 DSQMS RED Parameters P E aia A E A TA TETEA anois E NE A 14 DSQMS Interface Parameters ccccccccccccsssssssceeeeeececeeecseseseseaeeeeeeeeeeeseesesssssseeeeees A 16 DSQMS Queue Parameters sasssisiaseeiisnarreecionaiacicmannnenc PEIEE EEE P E E E T A 19 DSQMS Queue Classifier Parameters oiissssecssssssssesssavssseesssevseveensansarseeseasaesentsaus
39. Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Startup Query Interval Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Interfaces 31 2 to 240 Specifies the number of seconds between general queries sent by the router on this interface when it is started up Nortel Networks recommends that you set this parameter to 1 4 the value set for the Interface Query Rate parameter Specify the number of seconds from 2 through 240 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 13 2 1 30 Startup Query Count Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Interfaces 2 1to8 Specifies the number of general queries sent by the router on this interface when it is started up Nortel Networks recommends that you set this parameter to the same value as the Robustness Variable parameter Specify an integer from 1 through 8 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 13 2 1 31 Last Member Query Interval Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Interfaces 10 1 second 1 to 31 744 Specifies in tenths of a second the maximum response time used to calculate the maximum response code inserted into group specific queries and group and source specific queries sent in response to a leave group message You can use this parameter to tune the leave latency of the network A reduced value results in reduced time to detect the loss of the last
40. ID 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters You can also use the Technician Interface to modify parameters by issuing set and commit commands with the MIB object ID This process is the same as modifying parameters using Site Manager For information about using the Technician Interface to access the MIB see Using Technician Interface Software Caution The Technician Interface does not verify that the value you enter for a parameter is valid Entering an invalid value can corrupt your configuration Adjacent Host Parameter You use the following parameter to configure the local IP address for an adjacent host Parameter IP Local Address Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt Adjacent Hosts Default 0 0 0 0 Options Any valid IP address Function Specifies the IP address of the local IP interface The adjacent host must be on Instructions MIB Object ID the same subnet as the local IP interface Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation N A ATM Line Parameters You use the following parameters to configure ATM line details on the Passport 5430 The type of ATM link module you use determines the line details that you can edit Parameter Enable Path Configuration Manager gt ATM1 gt ATM Line Attributes Default Enable Options Enable Disable Function Enables or disables the line driver Instructions Select Enable or Disable MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 3 2 1 2
41. ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Relay Circuit Type Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Interfaces Downstream Upstream Primary Upstream Backup Downstream Specifies whether the IGMP circuit is configured as the primary upstream circuit the backup upstream circuit or a downstream no relay circuit You can configure only one primary and one backup upstream circuit on the router 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 13 2 1 23 Relay Report Interval Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Interfaces 10 0 to 255 Specifies the interval in seconds between group membership reports on an IGMP Relay primary or backup circuit If you set this parameter to 0 IGMP Relay sends only one unsolicited group report Specify an interval in seconds 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 13 2 1 24 Robustness Variable Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Interfaces 2 1 to8 Specifies a tuning value for the expected packet loss on the network If you anticipate greater loss of packets on the network set this parameter to a higher value Reset the robustness variable if desired 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 13 2 1 29 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 43 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options
42. Large Categorizes how sensitive traffic in this queue is to the jitter effect and thus provides an indicator for calculating the bucket size in flow fairness Reset this parameter if the packets that this queue will handle are small for example VoIP packets or large for example video packets Reset this parameter if the packets that this queue will handle are small or large Otherwise accept the default value Normal 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 16 2 1 17 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 23 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Drop Type Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt DSQMS gt Interface gt Queues Tail Drop Tail Drop RED Indicates whether RED is used for active queue management To enable RED for queue management select RED Otherwise accept the default value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 16 2 1 19 Average Queue Gain Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt DSQMS gt Interface gt Queues 30 1 through 100 Specifies the percentage of buffer capacity that must fill for 1 second or more for DSQMS to compute a larger average queue size for use by RED To specify a different percentage enter an integer from 0 through 100 Otherwise acce
43. Mapping Table Configuration window see Configuring X 25 Services For more information about the XID Retry parameter see page A 61 314470 15 6 Rev 00 18 1 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Setting the LLC Connect Timer Some IBM hosts may take several minutes to establish connections over QLLC service for X 25 thereby exceeding the hard coded 25 second timeout interval for DLSw You can now configure the DLSw timeout interval to values greater than 25 seconds up to 600 seconds using the Technician Interface Caution The default value for wfDlsLLCConnectTime is 25 seconds You should never change this value unless absolutely necessary This value should not be changed unless there is a justifiable network requirement Accepting Incoming X 25 Calls for QLLC Service X 25 PAD BayRS now accepts incoming X 25 calls for QLLC service from devices that do not have an X 121 calling address Only one X 25 connection can be supported at any given time You can enable or disable this feature using the No Calling Address parameter on the X 25 Service Configuration window For information about accessing the parameters on the X 25 Service Configuration window see Configuring X 25 Services For more information about the No Calling Address parameter see see page A 66 An X 25 packet assembler disassembler PAD provides access to an X 25 network for devices often character terminals that are not capable of sending
44. PVCs To configure FRF 12 fragmentation on the appropriate PVCs follow these steps 1 Navigate to a PVC that will fragment data packets as per FRF 12 serial 3 1 frame relay service boston pvc 33 pvc 3 1 33 Enable FRF 12 fragmentation on the PVC pvc 3 1 33 frf12 fragmentation enable enabled To disable FRF 12 enter frf12 fragmentation enable disabled If necessary change the minimum size of data packets to be fragmented on the PVC The default value is 80 bytes pvc 3 1 33 frf12 fragmentation trigger size lt integer gt integer is the minimum size of a data packet to fragment on this PVC this value specifies the size of the fragmented packet payload Any packet smaller than the specified number of bytes will not be fragmented 314470 15 6 Rev 00 9 21 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Configure FRF 12 Interleaving on the Interface To configure FRF 12 interleaving on the interface where the PVCs are configured follow these steps 1 Navigate to the appropriate interface DSQMS prompt pvc 3 1 33 box box serial 3 1 dsqms dsqms serial 3 1 S31 2 Enable FRF 12 interleaving on the interface dsaqms serial 3 1 S31 frf12 frag interleaving enable enabled To disable interleaving enter frf12 frag interleaving enable disabled 3 Ifneeded change the maximum number of consecutive data packet fragments to send with no voice packets interleaved The default value is 3 dsaqms serial 3
45. RADIUS accounting messages to be sent to the RADIUS server complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The RADIUS Access Control window choose Protocols gt Global Protocols gt opens RADIUS gt Access Control 2 Set the Login Accounting parameter to Enable For more information click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning in page A 62 3 Click on OK You return to the Configuration Manager window Using SecurlID for RADIUS Authentication The section Using SecurID for RADIUS Authentication on page 1 6 of Configuring RADIUS incorrectly states that Nortel Networks implements SecurID on ARN routers only Nortel Networks implements SecurID on all router platforms that operate as RADIUS clients 314470 15 6 Rev 00 15 5 Chapter 16 Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization Version 15 4 0 0 The following section is new to Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization part number 308645 15 0 Rev 00 Configuring IP Outbound Traffic Filters Using the BCC Outbound traffic filters act on packets that the router forwards to a local area network LAN or WAN through a particular interface Protocol prioritization allows the router to sort traffic into prioritized delivery queues high normal low These queues affect the sequence in which data leaves an interface You c
46. RED ID parameter Instructions Enter the 8 digit DSCP value that this classifier will sort traffic on Only traffic that includes this DSCP will be handled by this classifier MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 16 3 1 1 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 25 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Classifier Queue ID Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt DSQMS gt Interface gt Queues gt Classifier 1 1 through 30 Specifies the DSQMS queue that this classifier belongs to Enter the numerical queue ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 16 3 1 4 Classifier RED ID Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt DSQMS gt Interface gt Queues gt Classifier 0 0 through 65535 Specifies the numerical ID of the DSQMS RED instance that this traffic classifier will use to manage traffic The RED instance IDs are displayed in the Edit RED Parameters window Set this parameter only if you are associating a set of RED attributes with the classifier If this traffic classifier will use a RED instance enter the value of the configured RED instance Otherwise accept the default value 0 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 16 3 1 5 A 26 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Frame Relay PVC Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function
47. Report Timer LQR Reporting Period Inbound Link Quality e Outbound Link Quality Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions in Appendix A of Configuring PPP Services 7 Click on Apply 8 Click on Done You return to the PPP Interface List window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Using the BCC To configure PPP link quality monitoring and reporting on a HSSI interface 1 Navigate to the HSSI interface where you will configure PPP link quality monitoring and reporting box hssi 3 1 hssi 3 1 Navigate to the PPP line parameters hssi 3 1 ppp ppp 3 1 line line 3 1 Display the PPP line parameters The link quality monitoring and link quality reporting parameters are in bold line 3 1 info allow pap project disabled async control character map 655360 chap local name chap periodic timer 0 chap secret echo replies lost 3 echo requests 0 enable pap fallback disabled 14 10 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring PPP Services link quality protocol none local authentication protocol none local pap id local pap password lqr percentage received 90 lqr percentage sent 90 lqr reporting period 3 magic number enabled max configure fails 10 max configure requests 10 max terminate requests 2 mru size 1500 peer lqr timer enabled remote pap id remote pap password restart timer 3 rfcl1661 compliance disabled state enabled line 3 1
48. SSM range Specifies the IGMP group for which the table specifies one or more source addresses that this group will receive multicast data from Enter the IGMP group address The address must be in the SSM range 99999 1099 2 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 45 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Translation Source List Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Translation Table gt Add Null IP addresses of sources for the specified group address Specifies a list of source IP addresses for the IGMP group These addresses will supply multicast data to the specified IGMP group Enter up to 64 source addresses in dotted decimal notation You should enter addresses in ascending order Duplicate addresses are not allowed 99999 1099 3 IGMP Static Forwarding Policy Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID The following descriptions for setting IGMP static forwarding policy parameters supersede those shown in Configuring IP Multicasting and Multimedia Services Use these parameters to specify multicast groups and sources for IGMP static forwarding policies Groups Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt Policy Filters gt IGMP gt Static Forwarding Entries An empty list Leave empty or specify one or more groups Identifies which multicast
49. Services Table 8 2 BCC VLAN Definition Parameters Parameter Values Function global vian id 1 through 4095 Specifies a unique identifier for the VLAN within the Layer 2 Layer 3 topology This numeric value must match the one assigned to the VLAN when it was initially configured on the adjacent Layer 2 device protocol type 0x8100 default Oxf5EA OxFFFF Specifies the contents of the TPID field in 802 1Q encapsulated frames originated by this VLAN This hexadecimal value must match the one assigned to the VLAN when it was initially configured on the adjacent Layer 2 device You can accept the default value 0x8100 if this router connects to a Nortel Networks 802 1Q Layer 2 Layer 3 device vlan name string Specifies a name to associate with the VLAN BayRS does not use this string For example the following command creates a VLAN called test with a global VLAN ID of 4 ethernet 2 1 vlan vlan name test global vian id 4 vilan test 4 You can also enter the same command as follows ethernet 2 1 vlan test 4 vian test 4 The following example creates a VLAN called finance with a global VLAN ID of 7 and a protocol type of 4705 hex ethernet 2 1 vlan finance 7 protocol type 4705 vlan finance 7 When you add a VLAN to the configuration the VLAN is enabled by default 3 Add an IP address to the configured VLAN vlan test 4 ip 1 1 1 1 24 ip
50. Startup Query Count parameter IGMP interface A 44 Startup Query Interval parameter IGMP interface A 44 Static Forward Cache Lifetime parameter IGMP interface A 42 static RP routers configuring for PIM SM 13 17 Site Manager parameter descriptions A 58 Sun SPARCstation Site Manager requirements 21 3 support Nortel Networks xx SVC Inactivity Timeout enabling disabling 3 8 specifying 3 8 SVCs enabling FRF 9 on 9 12 system requirements for Site Manager 21 3 T tagged frames 802 1Q 8 2 technical publications xx technical publications accessing on the Web 1 1 technical support xx Technical Support site 1 1 text conventions xvii Throughput parameter frame relay PVC A 28 Trace parameter PIM global A 56 traffic filter actions High 16 21 Length 16 21 Low 16 21 No Call 16 23 No Reset 16 23 traffic shaping enabling on frame relay PVCs using Site Manager 9 1 9 5 9 25 translation bridge implementation note 4 1 Translation Enable parameter IGMP global A 39 Index 6 translation table PIM configuring 13 15 parameter descriptions A 45 trap messages trap port setup 2 1 U upgrading boot and diagnostic PROMs 21 1 upgrading existing configuration files 21 8 upgrading Site Manager prerequisites 21 3 user manager lock 15 2 user defined criteria specifying 16 24 V VC monitoring using ifSpeed MIB variable 3 12 9 3 VRRP Address Ping parameter description A 65
51. Support From the Technical Support page you can open a Customer Service Request online or find the telephone number for the nearest Technical Solutions Center If you are not connected to the Internet you can call 1 800 4NORTEL 1 800 466 7835 to learn the telephone number for the nearest Technical Solutions Center An Express Routing Code ERC is available for many Nortel Networks products and services When you use an ERC your call is routed to a technical support person who specializes in supporting that product or service To locate an ERC for your product or service go to the http www nortel com help contact erc index html URL XX 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Chapter 1 BayRS Online Library CD The BayRS Online Library documentation CD Part No 314472 A was last updated for BayRS Version 15 2 0 0 This document change notice contains amendments to the BayRS software manuals since BayRS Version 15 1 0 0 Any hardware guide that has been revised since the final documentation CD was released is posted on the Nortel Networks Technical Support site Accessing Nortel Networks Documentation on the Web To access the latest version of BayRS hardware and software documents on the Nortel Networks Technical Support Web page 1 Go to the Technical Support URL www nortel com support 2 Click on the Browse product support tab 3 From the Product Families list choose BayRS Routers 4 From the Product list choose the h
52. address you first must enable the nssa default originate parameter To configure a not so stubby area NSSA forwarding address go to the area prompt for example box ip ospf area 0 0 0 3 and enter nssa route fwd addr lt value gt value is any valid IP address in the network 314470 15 6 Rev 00 11 9 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Using Site Manager Before you can configure a not so stubby area NSSA forwarding address you first must set the NSSA Originate Def Route parameter to Enable To configure a not so stubby area NSSA forwarding address complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 2 Choose IP The IP menu opens 3 Choose OSPF MOSPF The OSPF MOSPF menu opens 4 Choose Areas The OSPF Areas window opens 5 Click on the area that you want to edit The parameter values for that area appear in the OSPF Areas window 6 Set the NSSA Forward Address Note To use this parameter you first parameter Click on Help or see the must set the NSSA Originate Def Route parameter descriptions beginning on page parameter to Enable A 51 7 Click on Apply and then click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 11 10 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Chapter 12 Configuring IP Exterior Gateway Protocols
53. and receiving traffic across the X 25 interface The PAD establishes and maintains the link with the packet switched network assembles and disassembles packets communicates with the character terminal and handles special control processes for the character terminal Nortel Networks X 25 PAD services comply with the CCITT so called Triple X Standards Recommendations X 3 X 28 and X 29 Nortel Networks X 25 PAD services work only with X 25 SVCs for the current software release and only with the ARN router Only one ISDB per ARN is supported For instructions on installing an X 25 PAD see Installing the X 25 PAD For instructions on using Site Manager to configure X 25 PAD Services see Chapter 7 in Configuring X 25 Services 18 2 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Chapter 19 Quick Starting Routers Version 15 3 0 0 The following section contains an amendment to Chapter 10 Installing Site Manager on a SPARCstation in Quick Starting Routers SPARCstation System Requirements To run Site Manager your SPARCstation must meet the following hardware and software requirements Supported workstations SPARCstation 10 20 UltraSPARC Supported operating systems Solaris 2 7 and 2 8 Window environment CDE1 0 1 OpenWindows 3 5 32 MB of RAM 64 MB recommended 145 MB of disk space 32 MB of swap space Network adapter appropriate for your network CD ROM drive The following section contains an amendment
54. and outgoing bootstrap messages Incoming messages originate from other PIM routers outgoing messages originate from other PIM interfaces on the same router When you set this parameter to Disable this interface operates in accordance with RFC 2362 it accepts incoming messages and forwards outgoing ones Set to Enable if you want the interface to discard incoming and outgoing bootstrap messages Accept the default Disable if you want the interface to accept incoming messages and forward outgoing messages 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 14 2 1 32 Outgoing Interface Deletion Delay Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt PIM gt Interface 5 1 through 210 Specifies the number of seconds that the router waits before deleting an outgoing PIM interface after it receives a prune message from a downstream neighbor You may need to change the default value of this parameter if the BayRS router is on a LAN with routers that implement the override interval and LAN delay specified in the new PIMv2 draft In such a configuration this parameter should be set to a value larger than the sum of the override interval plus the LAN delay configured on the other routers Specify the number of seconds that the router should wait before deleting an outgoing interface after it receives a prune message 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 14 2 1 33 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 57 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice PIM Static RP Parameters Parameter
55. by individual users with a unique profile Accept the default value Disable to allow access by all users with the manager or user profile in addition to users with a unique profile Note If the user manager lock is enabled and the RADIUS server becomes unavailable the message RADIUS wait state appears in the User Manager Lock field When the RADIUS server becomes available the value reverts to Enable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 22 1 10 Login Accounting Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt Global Protocols gt RADIUS gt Access Control Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables login accounting Set to Enable if you want RADIUS Accounting messages to be sent to the RADIUS server Accept the default value Disable to prevent RADIUS accounting messages from being sent to the server 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 22 1 11 A 62 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters RADIUS Client Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID You use the following parameters to configure a RADIUS client This section replaces Client IP Address Parameter in Appendix A of Configuring RADIUS Authentication Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt Global Protocols gt RADIUS gt Create RADIUS gt Add or Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt Global Protocols gt RADIUS gt E
56. command For more information about using the wfsm and wftraps commands with the e option see Appendix A in Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager Note You can also change the trap port on a PC by editing the snmp trap 162 udp snmp string in the Services file From the Start menu choose Programs gt Windows Explorer Open the Services file and edit the string snmp trap 162 udp snmp For example to change the trap port from 162 to 779 enter snmp trap 779 udp snmp and reboot the PC Site Manager PC is then able to receive the traps from the router on port 779 2 2 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Chapter 3 Configuring ATM Services Version 15 2 0 0 The following section is new to Configuring ATM Services You use the procedures in this section to configure an ATM T3 E3 PMC module installed in a Passport 5430 For information about installing an ATM T3 E3 PMC module see ATM T3 E3 PMC Module Supplement Creating an ATM Circuit for a T3 or E3 Connection on a Passport 5430 To start ATM services on an ATM T3 E3 PMC module in the Passport 5430 you do the following 1 Configure the physical ATM circuit 2 Add protocols and other services to that circuit This section describes how you create a physical ATM circuit for a T3 or E3 connection on a Passport 5430 then directs you to Configuring ATM Services for information about adding protocols and further configuring ATM services Using the BCC To add ATM to a Passp
57. for frame relay service record kiev to 1000000 bits per second serial 3 1 frame relay frame relay 3 1 service kiev service kiev optional line speed 1000000 service kiev 9 4 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Frame Relay Services Using Site Manager To specify a line speed value for a frame relay service record complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Protocols menu opens choose Protocols 2 Choose Frame Relay The Frame Relay menu opens 3 Choose Services The Frame Relay Service List window opens 4 Click on the service record that you want to configure a line speed for 5 Set the Optional Line Speed parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 31 6 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Frame Relay Traffic Shaping with DSQMS Before Version 15 6 0 0 frame relay traffic shaping was implemented using protocol prioritization priority queuing as the QoS mechanism That is priority queuing was used to shape PVCs at the frame relay level even if DSQMS was configured at the interface level With Version 15 6 0 0 when you configure DSQMS at the interface level DSQMS will also be used as the QoS mechanism at the frame relay level Only PVCs can use DSQMS SVCs are not supported Note PVCs use the DSQMS configuration on th
58. host can signal that it wants to receive traffic only from specific sources sending to the multicast group INCLUDE mode or that it wants to receive traffic from all sources sending to a group except for specific sources EXCLUDE mode BayRS supports INCLUDE mode but only supports EXCLUDE mode with an empty source list for query and report messages Note For IGMP Version 3 new IGMP global and interface parameters were added and some existing parameters were changed or made obsolete For this reason all IGMP global and interface parameters are provided in Appendix A Site Manager Parameters beginning on page A 35 References For complete information about IGMP Version 3 PIM SSM and PIM SM see the following documents Internet Group Management Protocol Version 3 RFC 3376 B Cain S Deering I Kouvelas B Fenner A Thyagarajan 10 2002 http www ietf org rfc rfc3376 txt An Overview of Source Specific Multicast SSM RFC 3569 S Bhattacharyya Ed 7 2003 http www ietf org rfc rfc3569 txt Protocol Independent Multicast Sparse Mode PIM SM Protocol Specification RFC 2362 D Estrin D Farinacci A Helmy D Thaler S Deering M Handley V Jacobson C Liu P Sharma L Wei 6 1998 http www ietf org rfc rfc2362 txt Protocol Independent Multicast Sparse Mode PIM SM Protocol Specification Revised Internet Draft Bill Fenner Mark Handley Hugh Holbrook Isidor Kouvelas 10 2004 h
59. host groups match this policy If you want this filter to match all multicast host groups do not enter a value in the Groups field To match specific groups click in the parameter field Then click on the List button and complete the following fields Group Enter the IP address or range of addresses for the group Mask Enter the subnet mask for the group address or range of addresses Match Criteria Select Exact to match only the group with the specified address and mask or select Range to match all groups in the specified range of group addresses and masks 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 6 20 1 5 A 46 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Sources Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt Policy Filters gt IGMP gt Static Forwarding Entries An empty list Leave empty or specify one or more multicast sources Identifies which multicast sources match this policy If you want this filter to match all multicast sources do not enter a value in the Sources field To specify a particular multicast source or range of sources click in the parameter field Then click on the List button and complete the following fields Source Address Enter the IP address of the device or devices sending the multicast data Source Mask Enter the subnet mask for the source address or range of addresses 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3
60. member of a group or source Specify the interval in tenths of a second 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 13 2 1 32 A 44 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Last Member Query Count Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Interfaces 2 1to8 Specifies the maximum number of group specific queries sent before the router assumes that there are no more local members For IGMP Version 3 this parameter specifies the maximum number of group and source specific queries sent before the router assumes that there are no listeners for a particular source Specify an integer from 1 through 8 Nortel Networks recommends that you set this parameter to the same value as the Robustness Variable parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 13 2 1 33 IGMP Translation Table Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID For IGMP Version 3 and PIM SSM you can create a translation table to map IGMP Version 2 group addresses to one or more IGMP Version 3 group source pairs The translation table enables the interoperation of IGMP Version 2 and PIM SM with IGMP Version 3 and PIM SSM Use the following descriptions to create translation table entries Group Address Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Translation Table gt Add Null IGMP group address in the
61. of Open Software Foundation Inc Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation Solaris is a trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc SPARCstation and UltraSPARC are trademarks of Sparc International Inc UNIX is a trademark of X Open Company Limited The asterisk after a name denotes a trademarked item Restricted Rights Legend Use duplication or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 Notwithstanding any other license agreement that may pertain to or accompany the delivery of this computer software the rights of the United States Government regarding its use reproduction and disclosure are as set forth in the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 Statement of Conditions In the interest of improving internal design operational function and or reliability Nortel Networks Inc reserves the right to make changes to the products described in this document without notice Nortel Networks Inc does not assume any liability that may occur due to the use or application of the product s or circuit layout s described herein Portions of the code in this software product may be Copyright 1988 Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of such portions are permitted provided that the abo
62. packet 314470 15 6 Rev 00 6 3 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice e Ifthe Ethernet interface is connected to an external access device such as DSL or cable modem then Nortel Networks recommends considering policing on the ingress interface of the router by configuring traffic filters and also enabling the dequeue at line rate parameter in DSQMS on the egress Ethernet interface for traffic management e If you enable flow fairness on a queue you cannot configure that queue as a best effort queue For information about enabling flow fairness on a queue or designating the queue as best effort see Modifying a DSQMS Queue in Configuring Differentiated Services e If you configure both weighted and priority queues on an interface you may experience latency problems with the highest priority queues To avoid such problems Ensure that the amount of high priority traffic is not excessive in the highest priority queues Set the DSQMS interface parameter dequeue at line rate to enabled the default value is disabled See Configuring DSQMS to Dequeue Packets at Line Rate in Configuring Differentiated Services for instructions in both priority and weighted queues in certain configurations when higher traffic levels are seen in these queues Caution Enabling the dequeue at line rate parameter may cause packet loss e If you implement RED for queue management instead of tail drop that is
63. part number 308624 14 20 Rev 00 Configure Traffic Shaping on the PVCs To configure traffic shaping on the PVCs where frame relay fragmentation will occur follow these steps 1 Navigate to a PVC that will fragment data packets as per FRF 12 dsqms serial 3 1 S31 back serial 3 1 frame relay service boston service boston pve 33 pvc 3 1 33 2 Set the committed information rate CIR for the PVC pvc 3 1 33 cir lt integer gt integer is the number of guaranteed bits s that the router can transmit over a specified time interval when no congestion is occurring 9 20 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Frame Relay Services Note For complete information about configuring traffic shaping on PVCs see Configuring Frame Relay Services part number 308624 15 0 Rev 00 Set the committed burst rate B for the PVC In general you set this parameter to 1 4 the value of the CIR pvc 3 1 33 committed burst lt integer gt integer is the maximum number of bits s that the router can transmit over a specified time interval when congestion occurs Set the excess burst rate Be for the PVC If you set this parameter to a value other than 0 the default value the router can send traffic exceeding the CIR pvc 3 1 33 excess burst lt integer gt integer is the number of extra bits s that the router attempts to transmit over a specified time interval when congestion occurs Configure FRF 12 Fragmentation on the
64. portion of the banner Chicken Delight We Deliver and its Licensors Copyright 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 All rights reserved Login 314470 15 6 Rev 00 23 3 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice e If the contents of oem txt begin with the string NO BANNER excluding quotes the login banner is suppressed but the prompt is retained Login e Ifthe NO BANNER string is followed by nonblank characters they become the banner prompt Enter user name Note While changes to the oem txt file will be reflected when the next Telnet connection is established the change to the console login banner prompt will not take effect until the next system reset 23 4 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Chapter 24 Using the Bay Command Console BCC Version 15 6 0 0 The following sections contain additions to Using the Bay Command Console BCC part number 308659 14 20 Rev 00 Topic Page Using the source Command to Configure a Router 24 1 show hardware Command 24 2 Configuring the BCC Inactivity Timer 24 4 Using the source Command to Configure a Router This section is an addition to Chapter 3 Entering Commands and Using Command Files You must use the source command to configure a router from a command file Do not cut and paste the output of the BCC show config command directly into the BCC Such an atte
65. router complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Protocols menu opens choose Protocols 2 Choose IP The IP menu opens 3 Choose PIM The PIM menu opens 4 Choose Global The PIM Global Configuration window opens continued 314470 15 6 Rev 00 13 9 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 5 Set the Source Specific Multicast parameter to Disable Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 53 6 Click on OK You return to the Configuration Manager window Configuring Equal Cost Multipath Support for PIM SSM To distribute PIM SSM traffic to the same destination over multiple equal cost paths in the IP routing table enable equal cost multipath ECMP support ECMP enables PIM SSM to choose different forwarding paths for different source group pairs These forwarding paths are multicast table manager MTM entries with different incoming or outgoing interfaces To enable ECMP support for PIM SSM perform these steps 1 Set the Equal Cost Multipath parameter to Enable on the PIM Global Configuration window 2 Choose an ECMP method by setting the Multiple Nexthop Calculation Method parameter on the Edit IP Global Parameters window You can select any method to enable ECMP support for PIM SSM
66. routes you enter either show ip alerts or show ip routes but not both 314470 15 6 Rev 00 xvii BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Acronyms This guide uses the following acronyms ARP Address Resolution Protocol AS autonomous system ASE autonomous system external ATM asynchronous transfer mode BGP Border Gateway Protocol DLSw data link switching DSCP differentiated services code point DSQMS differentiated services queue management and scheduling ECMP equal cost multipath FDDI Fiber Distributed Data Interface GRE Generic Routing Encapsulation HSSI High Speed Serial Interface ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol IP Internet Protocol IPsec Internet Protocol Security LCP Link Control Protocol LLC logical link control LMI Local Management Interface LQM Link Quality Monitoring LQR Link Quality Report LSA link state advertisement LSDB link state database MIB management information base MTU maximum transmission unit xviii 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Preface NAT NLPID NSSA OSPF PBBI PBBR PIM PMC PPP PVC QLLC Qos RADIUS RARP RED RIP RP SM SNMP SSM SRB SVC ToS VC VRRP Network Address Translation network layer protocol identifier not so stubby area Open Shortest Path First PIM bootstrap border interface PIM bootstrap border router Protocol Independent Multicast PCI mezzanine card Point to Point Protocol permanent v
67. specify match criteria for filters as described in the following sections Topic Page Source and destination network 16 11 Source and destination TCP and UDP port 16 12 Protocol type 16 15 Type of service 16 16 Established TCP ports 16 16 User defined criteria 16 24 Specifying Source and Destination Networks As Match Criteria To filter on source and destination networks go to the match ip ip prompt for example for example box serial 3 1 protocol priority ip outbound filter lt filter_name gt match ip ip and do the following for each source and destination network that you want to filter on 1 Enter the following command source destination network lt address_range gt lt address_range gt specifies a range of IP addresses for source and destination networks The source network or destination network prompt appears 2 Go back to the match ip ip prompt back Example match ip ip ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 source network 10 1 0 0 10 1 255 255 source network ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 10 1 0 0 10 1 255 255 back match ip ip ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 destination network 10 2 0 0 10 2 255 255 destination network ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 10 2 0 0 10 2 255 255 back match ip ip ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 314470 15 6 Rev 00 16 11 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Specifying Source and Destination T
68. that the lower the number the higher the priority The description should state that the higher the number the higher the priority For example a COPS server with a priority of 2 will be the active server before a server with a priority of 1 Version 15 3 0 0 The following section is an amendment to Chapter 2 Starting Differentiated Services in Configuring Differentiated Services Implementation Notes The following guidelines can help you successfully configure DSQMS on your router e You can configure DSQMS on these interfaces only HSSI MCT1 MCE1 T1 FT1 E1 FE1 and synchronous e If you enable flow fairness on a queue you cannot configure that queue as a best effort queue For information about enabling flow fairness on a queue or designating the queue as best effort see Modifying a DSQMS Queue in Configuring Differentiated Services e Ifyou configure both weighted and priority queues on an interface you may experience latency problems with the highest priority queues To avoid such problems Ensure that the amount of high priority traffic is not excessive in the highest priority queues 6 2 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Differentiated Services Set the DSQMS interface parameter dequeue at line rate to enabled the default value is disabled See Configuring DSQMS to Dequeue Packets at Line Rate in Configuring Differentiated Services for instructions Caution Enabling the deq
69. the GRE tunnel is down Keepalive Retries Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt GRE gt Remote Conn 3 2 to 254 inclusive Specifies the amount of time that the router waits for a reply to a GRE keepalive message sent from a GRE tunnel s local endpoint to its remote endpoint before declaring that the GRE tunnel is down This waiting period is calculated by multiplying the currently configured value of the Keepalive Retry Timeout parameter by the value of this parameter Specify the number by which to multiply the currently configured value of the Keepalive Retry Timeout parameter in order to calculate the Keepalive Retries waiting period For example if the Keepalive Retry Timeout parameter is set to 20 seconds and you set the value of this parameter to 6 then the router will wait 120 seconds 6 x 20 seconds for a reply to the GRE keepalive message before declaring that the GRE tunnel is down 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 28 1 10 A 34 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters IGMP Global Parameters For IGMP Version 3 introduced in BayRS Version 15 6 a number of new IGMP global parameters were added and a number of existing parameters were changed or made obsolete For this reason all IGMP global parameters are provided in this section Use the following descriptions to set IGMP global parameters Note The global IGMP parameter Version Threshold Time is now obsolete and no longer appears on the IGM
70. the MTU size in octets For example the following command sets the MTU size to 3000 octets atm e3 1 1 2 1 mtu 3000 atm e3 1 1 2 1 Defining the Primary Clock Source To define the clock signal source navigate to the ATM interface prompt for example box atm 1 1 2 1 atm e3 and enter primary clock source lt value gt value is internal or loop If you select internal the router will generate the clock signal source If you select the default loop the clock signal source will be external to the router 3 4 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring ATM Services For example the following command sets the clock source to internal atm e3 1 1 2 1 primary clock source internal atm e3 1 1 2 1 Specifying the Setup Alarm Threshold To specify the duration of time in seconds that elapses following the detection of a performance failure before the condition is registered and logged navigate to the ATM interface prompt for example box atm 1 1 2 1 atm e3 and enter setup alarm threshold lt integer gt integer is a value from 2 through 10 seconds inclusive For example the following command changes the setup alarm threshold from 2 to 8 seconds atm e3 1 1 2 1 setup alarm threshold 8 atm e3 1 1 2 1 Disabling and Reenabling the ATM interface By default the ATM interface is enabled when you create the circuit However you can disable or reenable the interface at any time When the interface is enabled t
71. the router s internal clock automatically sets itself one hour ahead at 2 00 am on the first Sunday in April and sets itself back one hour at 2 00 am on the last Sunday in October Currently only four time zones are supported Eastern Central Mountain and Pacific To enable the daylight savings time feature enter the following command at the Technician Interface prompt set wfSys wfSysDaylightSaving 0 1 commit Removing the Technician Interface Login Banner You can now replace or modify the login banner and prompt presented via a Telnet connection or on the router console The method uses the placement of an optional text file on the router flash named oem txt If this file is present when the Technician Interface initializes for a potential login from console or via Telnet its contents govern the nature of the login banner This file can be used for explicit identification purposes positive indication that the desired system has been reached security concerns a nonspecific banner to avoid aiding unauthorized accesses or cosmetic reasons The rules are as follows e By default in the absence of the file oem txt the login banner and prompt appear as follows Nortel Networks Inc and its Licensors Copyright 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 All rights reserved Login e If the file oem txt is present its contents replace only the Nortel Networks Inc
72. up at that time on the router However this implementation sometimes caused convergence problems when the interface with the lowest IP address went down and the next available interface IP address was used as the ASE forwarding address Using the Version 15 5 0 0 functionality a network administrator now can specify the IP address to be used as the ASE forwarding address thus enabling him or her to specify the IP address of an interface that is known to stay up all the time To ensure maximum up time it is recommended that you use the IP address of the circuitless IP interface on the router as the ASE forwarding address To use this functionality you must configure two new parameters as described in the following sections e Enabling and Disabling RFC 3101 Forwarding Address Compatibility e Configuring the Not So Stubby Area NSSA Forwarding Address When you start OSPF on the router RFC 3101 compatibility is disabled by default When RFC 3101 compatibility is disabled any configured ASE forwarding address is ignored 314470 15 6 Rev 00 11 7 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Enabling and Disabling RFC 3101 Forwarding Address Compatibility You can use the BCC or Site Manager to enable and disable RFC 3101 compatibility on the router Using the BCC To enable or disable RFC 3101 compatibility on the router go to the global OSPF prompt for example box ip ospf and enter rfe3101 fwd addr compatibil
73. user or manager profile and also by individual users with a unique profile You enable the lock when both the RADIUS client and server are available You disable the lock if the RADIUS server is not available allowing the user to log in with the manager or user profile 15 2 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring RADIUS When you enable the user manager lock and a RADIUS server is unavailable for authentication the router automatically disables the user manager lock When the RADIUS server becomes available the router automatically enables the user manager lock Note Be sure to configure RADIUS and assign the appropriate access to individuals with unique profiles before you enable the user manager lock otherwise you may lock out system managers from the router Using the BCC To restrict access to individual users only navigate to the access prompt for example box access and enter user manager lock enable To allow access by all users with the manager or user profile in addition to users with a unique profile navigate to the access prompt for example box access and enter user manager lock disable Using Site Manager To restrict access to individual users only complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The RADIUS Access Control window choose Protocols gt Global Protocols gt opens RADIUS gt Access Contro
74. 0 90 and 50 through 53 as match criteria match ip ip ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 pri ip ip dest tcp ports 30 90 50 53 match ip ip ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 Example Source UDP Port This example specifies source UDP port 162 as match criteria match ip ip ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 pri ip ip src udp ports 162 match ip ip ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 Example Destination UDP Port This example specifies destination UDP port 69 as match criteria match ip ip ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 pri ip ip dest udp ports 69 match ip ip ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 Example Destination TCP and UDP Ports This example specifies both destination TCP and UDP ports 53 as match criteria match ip ip ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 pri ip ip dest tcp udp ports 53 match ip ip ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 Example Source TCP and UDP Ports This example specifies both source TCP and UDP ports 53 as match criteria match ip ip ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 pri ip ip src tcp udp ports 53 match ip ip ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 16 14 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization Specifying Protocol Identifiers As Match Criteria Internet Protocol Version 4 IPv4 specifies an 8 bit protocol field to identify the next level protocol You can use the protocol field to identify traffic tha
75. 0 Mb s ethernet 2 1 dsqms line speed 10000000 ethernet 2 1 Router Processing of Tagged Frames 802 1Q tagging is supported on 1OBASE T and 100BASE T interfaces that connect the Nortel Networks router to an 802 1Q compliant switch or routing switch With 802 1Q tagging enabled the physical connection between the router and the adjacent device supports multiple virtual connections The number of connections is equal to the number of virtual connections plus a default physical connection that provides transit services for other non VLAN traffic that may be received from or forwarded to the adjacent device Upon receipt of a frame across a virtual connection a circuit manager strips the four bytes of 802 1Q header information and directs a now standard Ethernet frame to a connection specific routing process The routing process consults its forwarding table and in turn directs the frame to a circuit manager handling the next hop connection If that connection is a non tagged non virtual connection processing is completed as for any other standard Ethernet frame However if the next hop connection is a tagged virtual connection the circuit manager inserts the four bytes of 802 1Q header information that identify that VLAN into the standard Ethernet header After performing the 802 1Q encapsulation the circuit manager forwards the frame across the virtual connection toward the destination VLAN Implementation Considerations Befo
76. 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 314470 15 6 Rev 00 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Editing a Tagged Circuit The only VLAN parameter that you can change other than the state parameter that disables and reenables a VLAN is the protocol type parameter By default this parameter is set to 0x8100 to allow this router to connect to a Nortel Networks 802 1Q Layer 2 Layer 3 device If the router is connected to a non Nortel Networks device set this parameter to the appropriate value The following example changes the value of the protocol type parameter for the VLAN test and displays the edited parameter ethernet 2 1 vlan test 4 vian test 4 protocol type fffd vlan test 4 info global vlan id 4 protocol type Oxfffd state enabled virtual port type tagged vlan name test vian test 4 Note You cannot edit the global vlan id or vian name parameter To change either parameter you must delete the VLAN and re create it with the correct VLAN name and global VLAN ID Also the only legal value for the virtual port type parameter is tagged so do not try to edit this parameter Disabling a Tagged Circuit To disable a tagged circuit go to the VLAN prompt for example box eth 2 1 vlan engineering 2 and enter state disabled For example the following commands disable and reenable the VLAN engineering on Ethernet interface 2 1 box ethernet 2 1 ethernet 2 1 vlan engineering 2 vilan engineering 2 s
77. 1 16 2 1 12 A 22 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Config Weight Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt DSQMS gt Interface gt Queues 1 1 through 100 Specifies the ratio of this queue to the sum of all weighted queues on the interface This ratio can be calculated relative to other queue values or expressed as a percentage provided that all weighted queues add up to 100 This parameter applies to weighted queues only Enter a value from 1 through 100 or accept the default value 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 16 2 1 13 Flow Fairness Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt DSQMS gt Interface gt Queues Disable Enable Disable Specifies whether a hash table is used to separate data packets into buckets within this queue This mechanism improves fairness within a queue You cannot configure flow fairness on the best effort queue To enable the use of a hash table to separate data packets into buckets within this queue select Enable Otherwise accept the default value Disable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 16 2 1 16 Jitter Constant Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt DSQMS gt Interface gt Queues Normal Small Normal
78. 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 16 1 1 2 A 16 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Debug Level Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt DSQMS gt Interface None Trace Detailed None By default the router does not log event messages generated by DSQMS To troubleshoot a problem set this parameter to Trace to log related DSQMS function names or to Detailed to log trace messages some environment variables and queue information Accept the default value None to prevent the router from logging DSQMS event messages To troubleshoot a problem set this parameter to Trace or to Detailed 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 16 1 1 11 Dequeue At Line Rate Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt DSQMS gt Interface Disable Enable Disable Controls the dequeuing of packets from the queues to the driver and guarantees constant bandwidth for traffic that requires a constant delay rate when there are more buffers than the line can accommodate If you configure both weighted and priority queues on an interface you may experience latency problems with the high priority queues To reduce delay for queues that require a constant delay rate when limited bandwidth is available enable this parameter Note Enabling this parameter may cause packet loss in both pri
79. 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 13 1 4 Debug Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Global None See instructions Causes IGMP to generate the specified log messages Click on Values and select the types of log messages that you want IGMP to generate The Debug field displays the following bitmasks for each type of message 0x00000001 for received IGMP join leave packets 0x00000002 for sent IGMP messages 0x00000004 for received multicast protocol messages 0x00000008 for MTRACE log messages 0x00000010 for configuration log messages 0x00000020 for interaction with multicast protocols 0x00000040 for interaction with RSVP 0x00000080 for MTM forwarding cache log messages 0x00000100 for IGMP Relay log messages 0x00000200 for received IGMP Version 3 log messages 0x00000400 for sent IGMP Version 3 log messages 0x00000800 for other IGMP Version 3 log messages 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 13 1 6 A 36 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Join Ack Enable Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Global Disable Enable Disable Indicates whether IGMP should send an immediate response in the form of a query to the group associated with
80. 1 5 RFC 3101 Forwarding Address Compatibility for OSPF NSSA eeceteerreeee 11 7 Enabling and Disabling RFC 3101 Forwarding Address Compatibility a 11 8 Configuring the Not So Stubby Area NSSA Forwarding Address 11 9 Chapter 12 Configuring IP Exterior Gateway Protocols BGP and EGP MURRSRUONN 1 Dp T apna ratte A nena A E E E he duets care 12 1 BGP implementation NOTES icjioist ss sccrattnousiieiauindeie mith ansies aust aldomn 12 1 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Chapter 13 Configuring IP Multicasting and Multimedia Services version 1820 sercis arna T pian aa ieina PERE 13 1 Configuring a PIM en Bonder ROUET nee err a een nr eeees Renee tees rei rererreerr eee cen 13 1 MGSO PEG catiesiennsiess tiniest dvi eee pininana iipeadadianieaieens 13 2 Overview of IGMP Version 3 aa PIM SSM E re ETTE E T 13 2 How BayRS Implements SSM 0 ecceecseeesceeeseeeeeneeeeeneceeeneeeeteaeeeeeaeeeeeneneetaas 13 3 PICTEV SNCS siccis nainen iradia erica E T eaeaetees 13 4 starting IGMP Version Sand PIM SSM ssciessssusseiseertr ae nasties iai eiiie 13 5 Adding IGMP Version 3 and PIM SSM to the Router sssr 13 5 Editing IGMP and PIM Parameters for PIM SSM Urasa E 13 7 Customizing IGMP Version 3 and PIM SSM ecccccecceeceteeeeeeeeeteneeeeeneeeeeneeeteeaeeees 13 9 Disabling and Reenabling PIM SSM sscseccsissceceessssaseisanascenessenssaneseesaecensuesaasauee 13 9 Configuring Equal Cost Multipath Support for PI
81. 10 Click on Add The Edit DSQMS Classifier List window opens The Classifier ID Selection window opens 11 Type an 8 digit binary octet DSCP See the parameter description on page A 25 12 Click on OK You return to the Edit DSQMS Classifiers window opens 13 Set the following parameters e Classifier Queue ID e Classifier RED ID Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 25 14 Click on Done You return to the Edit DSQMS Classifier List window 15 To configure more classifiers repeat steps 9 through 14 16 Click on Done 17 To configure more queues repeat steps 5 through 16 You return to the Edit DSQMS Queue List window continued 314470 15 6 Rev 00 6 17 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 18 Click on Done System responds You return to the Edit DSQMS Parameters window 19 Click on Done Modifying RED Parameters You return to the Configuration Manager window You can modify parameters for an instance of DSQMS RED To edit an RED instance perform the following steps Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens Choose DSQMS The DSQMS menu opens 3 Choose RED 4 Select the RED instance that you want to
82. 18 09 19 EST Vlan taglq Circuits vlan Physical lt cct gt Protocol Enabled Vlan Name Circuit Circuit Local Id Global Id Type Disabled test test test 2 100 0x33024 enabled test test test 3 101 0x33024 enabled test test test 4 102 0x33024 disabled The following example displays information about all enabled tagged circuits box show tag1q circuits enabled show taglq circuits enabled Nov 05 2004 18 12 20 EST Vlan taglq Circuits vlan Physical lt cct gt Protocol Enabled Vlan Name Circuit Circuit Local Id Global Id Type Disabled test test test 2 100 0x33024 enabled test test test 3 101 0x33024 enabled The following example displays information about tagged circuit 3 box show tag1q circuits circuit 3 show taglq circuits circuit 3 Nov 05 2004 18 12 34 EST Vlan taglq Circuits vlan Physical lt cct gt Protocol Enabled Vlan Name Circuit Circuit Local Id Global Id Type Disabled test test test 3 101 0x33024 enabled 8 12 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Chapter 9 Configuring Frame Relay Services Version 15 1 0 0 The following changes are required to the Configuring Frame Relay Services book A new frame relay parameter Bw Threshold has been added to the PVC List for Services window in Site Manager The Bw Threshold parameter works in conjunction with the Committed Burst Excess Burst and Throughput parameters to shape traffic The following section updates the Site Manager proce
83. 2 6 20 1 10 IP Global Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID You use the following parameter to disable directed broadcast Directed Broadcast Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt Global Enable Enable Disable When this parameter is enabled a packet addressed to an IP broadcast address goes to all systems on the target network By default directed broadcast is enabled Caution Internet service providers have reported forged ICMP echo request packets sent to IP addresses SMURF attacks sometimes resulting in severe network congestion To prevent these attacks directed broadcast must be disabled Accept the default Enable if you want the directed broadcast feature to be enabled Set to Disable if you want directed broadcast to be disabled 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 1 28 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 47 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID You use the following parameter to enable or disable ICMP ECHO request Icmp Echo Request Unique Id Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt Global Disable Enable Disable When this parameter is enabled a unique identifier is added to each ICMP echo request message Accept the default Disable if you do not wan
84. 20 2 show gre logical ipx tunnels n se E E eat E E 20 3 Show gre physical Tunnels 2 05 aces iraani bee aie 20 4 Chapter 21 Upgrading Routers to BayRS Version 15 x WOISHOM TED E E T 21 1 314470 15 6 Rev 00 xi Why You Upgrade Boot and Diagnostic PROMS cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeetaeeeseeees 21 1 yaron 19 200 cie ETE RES PE T 21 3 Site Manager Upgrade Prerequisites hoidin nenede EET enced A EE 21 3 Reviewing Site Manager System Requirements ccc ccccesececeseeeeeeeeneeeeaes 21 3 Version 15400 sccusssimticticiant pda ares ee ee sem ee 21 4 Upgrading and Verifying PROMS sisiran aain hs custaaareaaceertnceaas 21 4 Task 2 Updating the Existing Configuration File ccccceeceeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaees 21 8 Booting the Existing Configuration File iasa T ere 21 8 Saving the Configuration File in Dynamic Mode ar 21 8 Chapter 22 Using Technician Interface Scripts E E aE WO E E A E AOE A E AA E E 22 1 Using Scripts and Aliases to Dynamically Configure a Router cccseeeeeeees 22 1 Chapter 23 Using Technician Interface Software Koron TEO 0 Semen ec a cue rte ineer a tr treats re rere er 23 1 Diagnostics On Off Option for ARN Passport 2340 and Passport 5430 23 1 Setting Default Route Cost Using the Technician Interface cscceeeeeeees 23 1 Leela gh here 014 Gig gare eerie pace tase eee er erent trie re peeenn ted eer tre acer T terete
85. 21 010010 User NTP RADIUS Configurable RSVP continued 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Differentiated Services Table 6 4 Mapping of BayRS Protocols to DSCPs continued Traffic Category NNSC Network Protocol DSCP Scheduler Timely Bronze SNMP AF11 001010 User Configurable Standard FTP IKE HTTP DF CS0 User non IP traffic 000000 Configurable Telnet TFTP For additional information about ICMP SNMP and Telnet tagging see DSCP Tagging of ICMP SNMP and Telnet Packets on page 6 7 Note The Timely Standard category in Table 6 4 is redundant because all packets have a default DSCP value of CSO However it is included in the table to indicate which protocols receive best effort treatment Packets from all network protocols that are not included in any other traffic category in the table Critical Control Network Control Interactive and Responsive are directed to the best effort queue which corresponds to the Standard service class Interoperability of Protocol Prioritization and DSQMS The interoperability of protocol prioritization priority queuing and DSQMS has changed for Version 15 6 0 0 This section updates the information in Interoperability of Protocol Prioritization Priority Queuing and DSQMS on page 6 11 With Version 15 6 0 0 DSQMS operates at the driver level and at the frame relay level to allow DSQMS to be used as t
86. 3 5 3 2 1 24 1 22 was FRB Broadcast WAN Multicast 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 4 1 68 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 24 1 23 was FRM Cast 1 DLCl WAN Multicast 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 4 1 69 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 24 1 24 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring IP ARP RARP RIP and OSPF Services Site Manager Parameter Name Old OID New OID Slot Mask 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 4 1 75 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 24 1 27 Max Forwarding 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 4 1 104 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 24 1 46 Table Size was Forward Cache Size Unnumbered 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 4 1 111 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 24 1 47 Associated Alternate IP OSPF Maximum 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 3 1 18 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 1 21 Path Version 15 5 0 0 The following section Enabling and Disabling Unique Identifiers for ICMP Echo Requests is an addition to Chapter 3 Configuring and Customizing IP in Configuring IP ARP RARP RIP and OSPF Services The section RFC 3101 Forwarding Address Compatibility for OSPF NSSA on page 11 7 is an addition to Chapter 6 Configuring and Customizing OSPF in Configuring IP ARP RARP RIP and OSPF Services Enabling and Disabling Unique Identifiers for ICMP Echo Requests Beginning with BayRS Version 15 5 0 0 you can send an ICMP echo request with a unique identifier Utilizing this enhancement can help with problems pinging from a BayRS router to anothe
87. 4 7 multiclass extension to multilink overview 14 1 specifying fragment size for multiclass extension to multilink 14 5 PPP Interface parameter descriptions A 59 PPP Line parameter descriptions A 61 PPP Multilink Multiclass Classes parameter descriptions A 60 Priority parameter differentiated services 6 2 product support xx prom command 21 5 314470 15 6 Rev 00 PROMs upgrading and verifying 21 5 protocol prioritization configuring 16 2 configuring for DLSw 7 1 defined 16 21 interoperability with DSQMS 6 11 6 13 publications accessing on the Web 1 1 publications hard copy xx PVCs frame relay configuring FRF 12 on 9 19 configuring FRF 9 on 9 12 deleting from service records 9 2 enabling traffic shaping on 9 1 9 5 9 25 Q QLLC mapping table configuration parameter description A 61 QLLC service accepting incoming X 25 calls for 18 2 QLLC XID Retry enabling 18 1 Query Suppression parameter IGMP interface A 42 R RADIUS authentication and SecurID 15 5 configuring client 15 1 configuring login accounting 15 4 configuring the user manager lock 15 2 RADIUS access control parameter descriptions A 62 RADIUS client parameter descriptions A 63 RED parameter descriptions BCC 6 1 RED parameters modifying 20 1 Relay Circuit Type parameter IGMP interface A 43 Relay Forwarding Timeout parameter IGMP global A 38 Relay parameter IGMP global A 35 Relay Report In
88. 430 5 1 HP 9000 workstation Site Manager requirements 21 4 HSSI modules configuring PPP LQM and LQR on 14 9 IBM workstation Site Manager requirements 21 4 ICMP Echo Request Unique ID parameter IP Global A 48 ICMP echo requests enabling and disabling unique identifiers for 11 5 ifSpeed MIB variable setting value for ATM 3 12 frame relay 9 3 IGMP Global parameter descriptions A 35 IGMP Interface parameter descriptions A 39 IGMP Static Forwarding Policy parameter descriptions A 46 IGMP Translation Table parameter descriptions A 45 IGMP Version 3 BayRS implementation 13 3 configuration prerequisites 13 5 customizing 13 9 editing existing IGMP Version 2 configuration 13 7 editing fine tuning parameters 13 13 overview 13 2 reference documents 13 4 starting on router 13 5 implementation notes BGP 12 1 DSQMS 6 3 IP payload compression 5 3 translation bridge 4 1 inactivity timer BCC 24 4 Info Warnings parameter PIM global A 54 Install Private Address parameter NAT global A 50 314470 15 6 Rev 00 interface MTU ATM E3 defining 3 4 Interface Query Rate parameter IGMP interface A 40 IP adjacent host parameter description A 3 IP equal cost multipath ECMP 13 10 IP Global parameter descriptions A 47 IP Interface parameter description A 50 IP Local Address parameter IP adjacent host A 3 IP network ring ID for source routing bridge SRB specifying with the BCC 4 2
89. 6 15 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Example To match IGP packets enter the following command match ip ip ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 pri ip ip protocol 9 match ip ip ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 Specifying the Type of Service ToS As Match Criteria You can discriminate higher priority traffic from lower priority traffic by specifying the type of service as the matching criteria for the traffic filter To specify the type of service portion of the IP header enter the following command at the match ip ip prompt for example box serial 3 1 protocol priority ip outbound filter lt filter_name gt match ip ip and enter pri ip ip tos lt ist_of_values gt list_of_values is a space delimited list It can be any number of values from 0 through 65 535 It can also specify ranges of values Use a dash instead of a space to indicate a range Example In this example the router matches packets whose ToS bit is set to 1 match ip ip ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 pri ip ip tos 1 match ip ip ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 Specifying TCP Established Match Criteria By default the router does not filter packets on the ACK and RESET bits in the TCP header To allow the router to filter packets with the ACK and RESET bits go to the match ip ip prompt for example box serial 3 1 protocol priority ip outbound filter lt fi ter_name gt match ip ip and enter the
90. 68 1 1 max queue size To specify the maximum size in bytes of each queue for a peer navigate to the peer s dlsw peer queue configuration prompt for example box disw disw peer queue configuration lt peer P address gt and enter max queue size lt value gt value is the maximum size in bytes for each of this peer s priority queues The range of valid values is from 5000 to 2147483647 inclusive The default is 16000 For example to specify 20000 as the maximum number of packets allowed in each DLSw priority queue for a peer with an IP address of 192 168 1 1 navigate to the peer s dlsw peer queue configuration prompt and enter dlsw peer queue configuration 192 168 1 1 max queue size 20000 dlsw peer queue configuration 192 168 1 1 314470 15 6 Rev 00 7 7 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Enabling and Disabling a Peer s DLSw Priority Queues Peer specific DLSw priority queues are disabled by default To enable the customized DLSw priority queues that you have configured for a specific peer navigate to the peer s dlsw peer queue configuration prompt for example box disw disw peer queue configuration lt peer P address gt and enter protocol priority enabled For example to enable the customized DLSw priority queues that you configured for a peer with an IP address of 192 168 1 1 navigate to the peer s dlsw peer queue configuration prompt and enter dlsw peer queue configuration
91. AR PURPOSE AND ANY WARRANTY OF NON INFRINGEMENT Nortel Networks is not obligated to provide support of any kind for the Software Some jurisdictions do not allow exclusion of implied warranties and in such event the above exclusions may not apply 3 Limitation of Remedies INNO EVENT SHALL NORTEL NETWORKS OR ITS AGENTS OR SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING a DAMAGES BASED ON ANY THIRD PARTY CLAIM b LOSS OF OR DAMAGE TO CUSTOMER S RECORDS FILES OR DATA OR c DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF NORTEL NETWORKS ITS AGENTS OR SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY The forgoing limitations of remedies also apply to any developer and or 314470 15 6 Rev 00 iii supplier of the Software Such developer and or supplier is an intended beneficiary of this Section Some jurisdictions do not allow these limitations or exclusions and in such event they may not apply 4 General a If Customer is the United States Government the following paragraph shall apply All Nortel Networks Software available under this License Agreement is commercial computer software and commercial computer software documentation and in the event Software is licensed for or on behalf of the United States Government the respective rights to the software and
92. Add The TAG1Q Parameters window opens continued 314470 15 6 Rev 00 8 5 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 7 Set the following parameters e VLAN Name e Global VLAN Id Click on Help to see the parameter descriptions 8 Click on OK The Edit VLAN Interface Parameters window opens Note that 802 1Q tagged circuits are displayed with a Vn extension 9 Select the 802 1Q tagged circuit that you are adding Set the Protocol Type hex parameter Retain the default value for connection to Nortel Networks 802 1Q enabled devices 10 Click on Apply and Done You return to the Configuration Manager window To add IP routing to the 802 1Q tagged circuit 11 Choose Circuits 12 Choose Edit Circuits The Circuit List window opens 13 Select the 802 1Q tagged circuit Note that 802 1Q tagged circuits are displayed with a Vn extension 14 Click on Edit The Circuit Definition window opens 15 Choose Protocols 16 Choose Add Delete The Select Protocols window opens 17 Select IP and click on OK The IP Configuration window opens 18 Enter an IP address and subnet mask and The Circuit Definition window opens click on OK 19 Choose File 20 Choose Exit The Circuit List window opens 21 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 314470 15 6 Rev
93. BASE T Interface er 8 8 Editing a Tagged Circuit lle pate E EA tes sees ARA pias cia E A TAT 8 10 Disabling a Tagged Circuit ceeeeeeeeee re aca 8 10 Deluna Tage OCW sariri ina N EE E E N 8 11 Displaying Information about Tagged Circuits ccceesseeceesssteeeeeessneeeeeeseens 8 11 Chapter 9 Configuring Frame Relay Services UAT s o E a sducasscasane cases E T T N E E E E E E E A A 9 1 Using Traffic Shaping Site Manager E eee rai eoii 9 1 TRI Reve a aaa treet rr errr tiprer re orn eeree Tee 9 2 Deleting PVCs from Service RecordS cceccceeesceeeeeeeeseneeeteeaeeteaeeeeeaeeseeaeeeteaeeeneas 9 2 Version TL00 sccccscasancenssnsqanrensarrmeoesiagaupeniarsmrenniaguteetarane pisaia EEE ERE re E Virtual Circuit aia with the MIB ACIDE sciri 9 3 Frame Relay Traffic Shaping with DSQMS cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeaeees iious 9 5 Configuration Prerequisites 0 0 peers eeerrere ee cre sdimikieae oe 9 6 Implementation Note Configuring the Packet Limit for Queues n 9 7 BCC show Command Enhancement cccceeeseeeeeteeeeeteeees EEE ET 9 7 Mew Technician Interlace SGHDE sess sascsisecs seacteesimcner ainet tnoi EREE N 9 8 viii 314470 15 6 Rev 00 New MIB for Monitoring DSQMS at the PVC Level seeen 9 8 Configuring FRF 9 Compression EEE E EE etree PRATE 9 9 Implementation of FRF 9 Compression on BayRS Routers ainia E 9 10 Configurat
94. BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Part No 314470 15 6 Rev 00 March 2005 600 Technology Park Drive Billerica MA 01821 4130 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice NANNAU AWOR D E NORTEL NETWORKS Copyright 2005 Nortel Networks All rights reserved March 2005 The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks Inc The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement and may only be used in accordance with the terms of that license The software license agreement is included in this document Trademarks Nortel Networks the Nortel Networks logo the Globemark Unified Networks AN BayRS BCN BLN BN and Passport are trademarks of Nortel Networks Adobe and Acrobat Reader are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Cisco is a trademark of Cisco Technology Inc Hi fn Hifn and LZS are trademarks of Hi fn Inc HP is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company IBM AIX and NetView are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation IBM Microsoft Windows and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation MOTIF is a trademark
95. BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice MIB Object IDs Please note the changes to the following MIB object IDs OIDs Note To get to the following parameters use the path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt Interfaces or Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt Global Site Manager was FRM Cast 2 DLCl Parameter Name Old OID New OID Subnet Mask 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 4 1 6 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 24 1 6 UnNumbered Assoc 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 4 1 110 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 24 1 47 Addr Mask 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 4 1 6 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 24 1 6 Broadcast Address 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 4 1 9 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 24 1 8 Cost 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 4 1 8 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 24 1 7 Host Cache 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 24 1 18 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 24 1 17 TR End Station 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 4 1 64 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 24 1 19 TR End Station 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 4 1 127 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 24 1 56 ARP Type Redirect 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 4 1 70 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 24 1 25 Ethernet Arp Encaps 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 4 1 71 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 24 1 26 SMDS Group 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 4 1 65 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 24 1 20 Address SMDS Arp Request 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 4 1 66 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 24 1 21 Address WAN Broadcast 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 4 1 67 1 3 6 1 4 1 18
96. CP and UDP Ports As Match Criteria To filter on TCP ports UDP ports or both you can specify only one of the following criteria for each filter e Source TCP ports destination TCP ports or both e Source UDP ports destination UDP ports or both e Both destination TCP and UDP ports e Both source TCP and UDP ports After you specify one of these options the BCC prevents you from specifying another in the same filter For example if you specify source TCP ports you can also specify destination TCP ports but you cannot specify source UDP ports When you specify one of these values the BCC automatically assigns the associated protocol ID 6 for TCP or 17 for UDP to the protocol parameter Therefore you cannot modify the protocol parameter of a filter that specifies a TCP or UDP port value To filter on TCP or UDP ports navigate to the match ip ip prompt for example box serial 3 1 protocol priority ip outbound filter lt filter_name gt match ip ip and enter the following command lt parameter gt lt range_of_ports gt parameter is one of the following Table 16 1 Table 16 1 TCP and UDP Match Criteria Parameters Parameter Specifies pri ip ip src tcp ports Source TCP port through which traffic is exiting the network pri ip ip dest tcp ports Destination TCP port through which traffic is entering the network pri ip ip src udp ports Source UDP port through which traffic is exiting the network p
97. Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID This section provides descriptions for new and changed PIM global configuration parameters that support PIM SSM Source Specific Multicast Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt PIM gt Global Disable Enable Disable Enables and disables source specific multicast SSM on a router running PIM Enable or disable SSM mode for PIM 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 14 1 37 Equal Cost Multipath Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt PIM gt Global Disable Enable Disable Enables and disables ECMP for PIM SSM Enable or disable ECMP for PIM SSM If you enable ECMP configure the global IP configuration parameters Multiple Nexthop Calculation Method see page A 49 IP OSPF Maximum Path and RIP Maximum Equal Cost Paths 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 14 1 38 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 53 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Parameter Info Warnings Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt PIM gt Global Default 0 Options 0 PIM modules for which you want to log info warning messages Function Enables or disables the logging of PIM informational and warning messages on the PIM router Instructions To disable logging of PIM informational and warning messages accept the default value 0 To enable logging of these messages click on Values and sele
98. Keepalive Functionality Beginning with Version 15 5 0 0 BayRS provides a more robust environment for packet forwarding over Generic Routing Encapsulation GRE tunnels by creating a keepalive mechanism that enables a router to monitor GRE traffic from a remote end point When this feature is enabled a router can verify that the status of a tunnel s state is up before it forwards packets over it You configure GRE keepalive functionality by performing the following tasks e Enabling or disabling keepalive messages e Configuring the keepalive retry timeout interval e Configuring the keepalive retries value The output for the following BCC show commands is enhanced to provide information about the GRE keepalive mechanism e show gre logical ip tunnels e show gre logical ipx tunnels e show gre physical tunnels For information about the enhanced output of these BCC show commands see Chapter 20 Reference for BCC IP show Commands in this document 314470 15 6 Rev 00 10 1 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Enabling and Disabling GRE Keepalive Messages for a Remote Tunnel End Point The GRE keepalive message functionality is disabled by default You can use the BCC or Site Manager to enable and disable the transmission of GRE keepalive messages between a GRE tunnel s local end point and one of its configured remote tunnel end points Using the BCC To enable and disable the transmission of GRE k
99. M SSM ENET E 13 10 Configuring PIM SSM Address Ranges cccccsssseceessesseeeesssseeeesseeneeeees 13 12 Editing IGMP Interface Fine tuning Parameters S 13 13 Configuring the PIM SM PIM SSM Translation Table a se 13 15 Configuring Static RP Routers for PIM SM ccccesccssecnceissceecsceassastevesesazesteeassaceneneses 13 17 Chapter 14 Configuring PPP Services et sip T Gere ements reer Prerrer renee rere ery rect er rece E E N er intr reer 14 1 Multi Class Extension to Multi Link PPP seeen kerin E iransi 14 1 Enabling and Disabling Multilink Multiclass on Interfaces eee 14 3 Specifying the Fragment Size for PPP Multilink Classes ceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 14 5 Enabling and Disabling Multilink Multiclass on Dial up Lines paabdbanrs peicceaeaias 14 7 e S a e a E ice EA E E T E widens NE EEEIEE en cude wade T ides 14 9 PPP Link Quality Monitoring and Reporting for HSSI Interfaces a n 14 9 Chapter 15 Configuring RADIUS PRIN 2 aa 15 1 Configuring a RADIUS Client Using Site kiaiagai sieasbeeneaad ai ETT aketi 15 1 Modifying Router Access Using the BCC or Site Manager c ccccccssseeeeeeeees 15 2 Usen Manager LOOK ssrisisiuriiririnnn risian E TET ET 15 2 Golo ie Ceci onana A 15 4 Using SecurlD for RADIUS Authentication R E E A E N AE A T E E 15 5 x 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Chapter 16 Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization Version TSG sccccctsscncecsticgeon
100. MP group queries and join messages Configuration Prerequisites Before you can configure PIM SSM on a router you must configure the router as follows e Disable IGMP Relay on the router on which you want to configure PIM PIM and IGMP Relay cannot be configured on the same router e Delete DVMRP and MOSPF from the interface on which you want to configure PIM PIM DVMRP and MOSPF cannot be configured on the same interface e Configure a unicast protocol RIP or OSPF on the same interface on which you want to configure PIM Or you can configure the interface as a static unicast route 314470 15 6 Rev 00 13 5 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice PIM requires a unicast protocol to propagate multicast traffic within the network For information about configuring unicast protocols see Configuring IP ARP RARP RIP and OSPF Services Configuring PIM SSM and IGMP Version 3 To start PIM SSM and IGMP Version 3 on the router 1 Configure a circuit on a slot and connector 2 Configure an IP interface on the circuit 3 Add PIM to the IP interface For information and instructions on configuring a circuit on a slot and connector see Configuring WAN Line Services or Configuring Ethernet FDDI and Token Ring Services After you successfully configure the circuit the Select Protocols window opens Proceed as follows Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Inthe Select Protoc
101. N 3 8 Defining the SVC Inactivity Timeout eeeeeeee Bisa E E TN E AE 3 8 Defining the Clocking Signal Source neiii sietisaas ee aai adai 3 10 GE s A a T a Ginn epee E E E A E E peer cern E ert eeert 3 11 Turning DS 3 and ES Cell Scrambling On and Off scsssecssacinssiscenscccasasciebesetevesteaasaces 3 11 SOD T O O R 3 12 Virtual Circuit Monitoring with the ifSpeed MIB Attribute 0 00 eeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 12 Chapter 4 Configuring Bridging Services pee 19 oe per eed 014 Ginn renee ree nner eseer reer eee een errr cer eter eer reece tr pana creer renter ener rere r erie 4 1 Interfaces Supported Sonna akuin ee E EE E E 4 1 E E EAE E A A A E O A E 4 1 Specifying the IP Network Ring ID for the Source Routing Bridge eeeceeeeeene 4 2 Chapter 5 Configuring Data Compression Services oe a bees T a E E E A A EE E EE S E E T 5 1 Hi fn LZS Compression for Passport 2430 and Passport 5430 naese Di 5 1 E TN ID A E A O E AA EA A A E 5 2 IP Payload Compression over GRE Tunnels ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 5 2 How IP Payload Compression Is Accomplished garies aribodisit gevccte tune ese 5 3 implementation Motes i c icin ine eae Configuring IP Payload Compression s s s AET N po Displaying Statistics for IP Payload Compression eceeeeeeeeseeeenetereteneees 5 6 Hi fn LZS Compression for BN Routers with FRE 4 PPC Modules 04 5 7 Chapter 6 Configuring D
102. P Global Configuration window Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Enable Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Global Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables this IGMP record If you configured IGMP on this router use this parameter to disable it 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 13 1 2 Relay Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Global Disable Enable Disable Enables and disables IGMP Relay Set the parameter as required 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 13 1 10 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 35 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Estimated Groups Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Global 20 5 to 65 535 Specifies the estimated number of multicast groups that will be simultaneously active for this router This estimate allows the router to use memory efficiently Exceeding this size during router operation will not cause an error but may cause the router to consume more memory than required Do not include in the count any group from 224 0 0 0 through 224 0 0 255 Determine the approximate number of groups and enter the value 1 3 6
103. PC 314470 15 6 Rev 00 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Adding a Tagged Circuit to an Unconfigured 10BASE T or 100BASE T Interface The following procedure describes how to add an 802 1Q tagged circuit to a previously unconfigured 1OBASE T or 100BASE T interface The procedure assumes that you are configuring the 802 1Q tagged circuit for IP routing To enable other routing protocols on an 802 1Q tagged circuit see the appropriate guide for that protocol Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Add Circuit window opens click on a 10BASE T or 100BASE T connector 2 Click on OK The Select Protocols window opens 3 Choose VLAN then click on OK The Edit VLAN Interface Parameters window opens 4 Click on Add The TAG1Q Parameters window opens 5 Set the following parameters e VLAN Name e Global VLAN Id Click on Help to see the parameter descriptions 6 Click on OK The Edit VLAN Interface Parameters window opens Note that 802 1Q tagged circuits are displayed with a Vn extension 7 Select the 802 1Q tagged circuit that you are adding Set the Protocol Type hex parameter Retain the default value for connection to Nortel Networks 802 1Q enabled devices 8 Click on Apply and Done You return to the Configuration Manager window To add IP routing to the 802 1Q tagged circuit 9 Choose Circuits
104. Protocols gt Global Protocols gt RADIUS gt Create RADIUS gt Add or Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt Global Protocols gt RADIUS gt Edit RADIUS NODEBUG ONE TWO THREE NODEBUG Assigns the level of RADIUS debug messages that the RADIUS client logs Accept the default value NODEBUG unless you are specifically trying to debug the connection 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 22 1 1 7 A 64 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters RIP Parameter You use the following parameter to specify whether the router imports RIP 1 updates only RIP 2 updates only or both RIP 1 and RIP 2 updates from a neighbor router Parameter RIP Compatible Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt RIP Interfaces Default Disabled Options Enable Disable Function Specifies whether RIP 1 accepts both RIP 1 broadcast and RIP 2 multicast packets and have RIP 2 always use multicast for transmitting updates or whether RIP 1 accepts RIP 1 broadcast and RIP 2 broadcast packets only RIP 1 will not accept RIP 2 multicast packets and have RIP 2 broadcast the packets making it compatible with RIP 1 Instructions Accept the default Disable if you want RIP 1 to accept both RIP 1 broadcast MIB Object ID and RIP 2 multicast packets Select Enable if you want RIP 1 to accept RIP 1 broadcast and RIP 2 broadcast packets only 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 2 2 1 22 VRRP Parameter You use the following parameter to enable or di
105. Rev 00 Configuring Data Compression Services Configuring IP Payload Compression You can use the BCC or Site Manager to configure IP payload compression on an IP interface that is configured on a GRE tunnel By default IP payload compression is disabled Using the BCC To enable or disable IP payload compression and decompression go to the IP interface prompt configured on the GRE tunnel for example box tunnels gre chicago ip 2 2 2 2 255 255 0 0 and enter payload compression lt state gt state is one of the following enabled disabled default For example the following command sequences enables IP payload compression and decompression on logical IP interface 2 2 2 2 configured on GRE tunnel chicago box tunnels tunnels gre chicago gre chicago ip 2 2 2 2 255 255 0 0 ip 2 2 2 2 255 255 0 0 payload compression enabled ip 2 2 2 2 255 255 0 0 The following command disables IP payload compression and decompression on logical IP interface 2 2 2 2 configured on the GRE tunnel chicago ip 2 2 2 2 255 255 0 0 payload compression disabled ip 2 2 2 2 255 255 0 0 314470 15 6 Rev 00 5 5 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Using Site Manager To enable or disable IP payload compression and decompression over a GRE tunnel complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Prot
106. SSM Translation Table 13415 Configuring Static RP Routers for PIM SM 13 17 Overview of IGMP Version 3 and PIM SSM BayRS Version 15 6 implements source specific multicasting SSM with the introduction of PIM SSM and IGMP Version 3 In the SSM model IP traffic is forwarded to receivers from only those multicast sources which the receivers have explicitly joined With source specific multicasting hosts behind BayRS routers can subscribe to multicast information from specific sources only IGMP is the Internet Engineering Task Force IETF standards track protocol used by hosts to signal multicast group membership to routers IGMP Version 3 supports source filtering which enables hosts to report interest in receiving packets from specific source addresses or from all but specific source addresses 13 2 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring IP Multicasting and Multimedia Services PIM SSM the routing protocol that supports the implementation of SSM is derived from PIM sparse mode PIM SM PIM SSM forwarding is based on a source based shortest path tree unlike PIM SM which supports a shared tree rooted at the rendezvous point RP For complete information about PIM SM and how BayRS implements it see Configuring IP Multicasting and Multimedia Services part number 308629 15 1 Rev 00 IGMP Version 3 and PIM SSM offer the following advantages Customers can deploy one to many audio and video broadcast applications that m
107. Speed variable is set to the line speed of the interface You can set the optional line speed parameter to a value corresponding to the rate of the virtual circuit that value will be reflected in the corresponding ifSpeed entry for each VC on the service record Note The value that you set is for reporting purposes only it has no effect on the actual performance of the ATM virtual circuit 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring ATM Services You can use the BCC or Site Manager to configure the optional line speed parameter on a service record Using the BCC You can specify a line speed value for a PVC service record or for a classical IP service record To set the line speed value navigate to the service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 pvc service boston or box atm 11 1 classical ip service dallas and enter optional line speed lt integer gt integer is the line speed for the service record in bits per second For example the following command sets the line speed for classical IP service record dallas to 1000000 bits per second classical ip service dallas optional line speed 1000000 classical ip service dallas Using Site Manager To specify a line speed value for a PVC service record or for a classical IP service record complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window clic
108. State State of the GRE connection up or down The state of a connection is up unless it is declared down as a result of keepalive failure or the GRE connection is disabled 20 2 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Reference for BCC IP show Commands Timer Retries show gre logical ipx tunnels Interval of time in seconds between transmission of successive keepalive packets to the remote endpoint Amount of time to wait before declaring a GRE connection down Retries is expressed as a multiple of the configured Timer value where Retries is the number by which the Timer value is multiplied The show gre logical ipx tunnels command displays information about the logical IPX connections configured on a GRE tunnel This command allows for the following command filters and arguments disabled enabled address lt address gt hame lt name gt lt name gt Displays information about disabled tunnels only Displays information about enabled tunnels only Displays information for tunnels configured with the specified IP address only Displays information for tunnels configured with the specified tunnel name only When you specify this filter it displays both the filter flag and value that is long notation Displays information for tunnels configured with the specified tunnel name only When you specify this filter it displays a value only that is short notation The output includes the fo
109. The interoperability of these two features can be summarized as follows DSQMS operates at the driver level only When frame relay is configured protocol prioritization operates at the driver level as well as at the frame relay level When both protocol prioritization and DSQMS are configured at the driver level DSQMS always takes precedence This means that such a configuration is inconsequential as far as protocol prioritization is concerned because at the driver level DSQMS will be running When both protocol prioritization and DSQMS are configured at the frame relay level only protocol prioritization operates because DSQMS operates only at the driver level BayRS code even before the DSCP tagging feature was available tags frame relay LMI as interrupt traffic only if protocol prioritization is configured So the purpose of protocol prioritization configuration for LMI is only to tag packets in the frame relay code so they can be identified later in the driver code When a tagged LMI packet comes to the driver the following occurs e When DSQMS is not configured protocol prioritization operates at the driver level In this case protocol prioritization identifies the tag and puts the LMI traffic into the Interrupt Queue e When DSQMS is configured it takes precedence over protocol prioritization In this case DSQMS identifies the tag and puts the LMI traffic into Internal Queue 1 IntQ1 314470 15 6 Rev 00 BayRS V
110. Threshold To specify the duration of time in seconds that elapses following the clearing of a performance failure before the condition is registered and logged navigate to the ATM interface prompt for example box atm 1 1 2 1 atm e3 and enter clear alarm threshold lt integer gt integer is a value from 2 through 10 seconds inclusive 3 2 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring ATM Services For example the following command changes the clear alarm threshold from 2 to 8 seconds atm e3 1 1 2 1 clear alarm threshold 8 atm e3 1 1 2 1 Specifying the Line Coding Method To specify the line coding method navigate to the ATM interface prompt for example box atm 1 1 2 1 atm e3 and enter line coding hdb3 b3zs The default for the ATM E3 interface is hdb3 and the default value for the ATM T3 interface is b3zs Specifying the Line Type To specify the line type for this interface navigate to the ATM interface prompt for example box atm 1 1 2 1 atm e3 and enter line type lt type gt type is autodetect ds3m23 or ds3cbitparity for the ATM T3 interface and e3framed or e3plcp for the ATM E3 interface If the line type is ds3m23 the framing mode should be m23 or t3m23plcp If the line type is ds3cbitparity the framing mode should be cbit or t3cbitplcp If the line type is either e3framed or e3plcp the framing mode should be either g75lor g832 For instructions on setting the framing mode paramet
111. VRRP ping enabling 17 1 X X 25 network service record parameter description A 66 X 25 QLLC mapping table parameter descriptions A 61 XID Retry parameter X 25 QLLC parameter A 61 314470 15 6 Rev 00
112. acket to a different next hop until it reaches the last of the available next hops then it repeats the sequence Round robin distribution attempts to make full use of available resources but may cause packets to be delivered out of order Source Destination Hash IP forwards all packets with a given source and destination address to the same next hop This method increases the chances that the packets will be delivered in order This forwarding algorithm is compatible with RIP and OSPF and with PIM SSM Destination Hash IP forwards all packets with the same destination address to the same next hop This forwarding algorithm is compatible with RSVP Multicast Only ECMP is disabled for unicast forwarding and the configured equal cost paths are used for PIM SSM forwarding only ECMP enables PIM SSM to choose different forwarding paths for different source group pairs These forwarding paths are multicast table manager MTM entries with different incoming or outgoing interfaces Instructions Click on Values and select the appropriate setting For unicast ECMP configure RIP and OSPF to support equal cost routes to the same destination For PIM SSM you must also enable the Source Specific Multicast and Equal Cost Multicast parameters on the PIM Global Configuration screen MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 1 18 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 49 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice IP Interface Parameter You use the followin
113. actions prompt box disw disw priority outbound filter dsap_01and02_q3 192 168 1 1 actions and enter actions dsap_0land02_q3 192 168 1 1 queue 1 actions dsap_0land02_q3 192 168 1 1 314470 15 6 Rev 00 7 13 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Specifying the Log Action To specify the log action for traffic that matches the filter s match criteria navigate to the peer filter s actions prompt for example box disw disw priority outbound filter lt filter_name gt lt peer_address gt actions and enter action log on off on the default indicates that when an outbound packet matches the filter s match criteria the DLSw outbound priority filter adds an entry to the system log file off specifies that no DLSw outbound priority filter information is written to the system event log file For example to turn off logging for a filter named dsap_O and02_q3 for a peer with an IP address of 192 168 1 1 navigate to the filter s actions prompt box disw disw priority outbound filter dsap_01and02_q3 192 168 1 1 actions and enter actions dsap_01land02_q3 192 168 1 1 action log off actions dsap_0Oland02_q3 192 168 1 1 For example to turn logging on again for a filter named dsap_Oland02_q3 for a peer with an IP address of 192 168 1 1 navigate to the filter s actions prompt box disw disw priority outbound filter dsap_01and02_q3 192 168 1 1 actions and enter actions dsap_01
114. aessesees A 25 Frame Relay FYC Parameters i sev scdaiae cnn devessdbe dusensdons dobwscuinidupasenadusaniueh AEEA SEa A 27 Frame Relay Service Record Parameter 0008 svibdispeenusures ee rte frre A 31 Frame Relay SYG Parameters so ces inden ed uae ree GRE Remote Connection Parameters oe Goad sens PE A ET A E A E AT A 33 IGMP Global Parameters oeiia panties P E PET erritan ARE ERER A 35 IGMP Interface Parameters cccccccccccccccccsssseessseseeeeeeeeeeeseeeesesaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesssaseeeeess A 39 IGMP Translation Table Parameters c cccccesesseeeeseeteeeees E E A 45 IGMP Static Forwarding Policy Parameters susricismssiiirnesiisiiconsiinsisi iiid A 46 IP Global Parameters cccccccecscscececsceceeeccsessesaeeeeeeeeeeeecesseessseaseceeeeeeeeseeseeessssaeeeess A 47 IP Interface Parameter EE anD EEEN STT ianiai E EEEE ee A 50 NAT Global Paramete stecsctesieeridct ences ceerecter rumen eee Ea ES N Ea regedit nE aa A 50 OSPF Global Parameter aici isectasaiseuiecka iejoottiadiiuvidienaioslabeiasagietiaigin ennai ce LETEA ET A 51 OSPF Area Parameter PPE ee ee eee reer eer ERETT coer A 51 OSPF RIP Announce Policy Parameter c cceccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseeeeeeesseeeeaees A 52 PIM Global Parameters E AE EE che bia tasks EE E EE E TTE A E ET A 53 PIM Ie acs PANS TRIS cas cecrticncstuetieno cima mime aie aise A 57 PIM Static RP Parameters
115. affic filters with prioritizing action to the circuit as described in Creating Outbound Traffic Filters later in this chapter To configure protocol priority navigate to the interface prompt for example box ethernet 2 1 and enter protocol priority For example the following command configures protocol priority on connector 1 of an Ethernet module installed in slot 2 ethernet 2 1 protocol priority protocol priority ethernet 2 1 Displaying Protocol Priority Parameter Values To view the current values of the protocol priority parameters navigate to the protocol priority prompt for example box ethernet 2 1 protocol priority and enter info 16 2 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization For example the following command shows the current parameter values for protocol priority protocol priority ethernet 2 1 info dequeue at line rate disabled high queue percentage bandwidth 70 high queue size 20 high water packets clear 0 low queue percentage bandwidth 10 low queue size 20 max high queue latency 250 normal queue percentage bandwidth 20 normal queue size 20 prioritization algorithm type bandwidth allocation state enabled protocol priority ethernet 2 1 Customizing Protocol Prioritization When you configure protocol prioritization on a circuit the router uses default values that help determine how priority filters work These defaults are designed to wo
116. agnostics On Off Option for ARN Passport 2340 and Passport 5430 For ARN Passport 2430 and Passport 5430 platforms only the Technician Interface diags command supports an option to enable or disable diagnostics effective the next time you cycle power on the router Disabling the diagnostics results in a faster boot time but leaves the hardware components unverified The syntax for this option is as follows diags on off lt s ot_id gt Setting Default Route Cost Using the Technician Interface When the routing table does not contain the route to a particular destination address the router looks for a default route As it does for any other route the routing table either acquires the default route dynamically through a routing protocol or you can enter the default route statically 314470 15 6 Rev 00 23 1 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice You can use the Technician Interface to set the wfRipIntfDefaultRouteCost RIP default route cost MIB attribute This attribute interacts with the Site Manager parameter Default Route Supply or the BCC parameter default supply in one of two ways e Ifyou select Enable for Default Route Supply or default supply RIP advertises the default route cost you set for wfRipIntfDefaultRouteCost attribute plus the default route learned from the network e If you select Generate for Default Route Supply or default supply RIP advertises the default route cost you set for wfRipI
117. ake use of source specific multicast technology for distributing multimedia content PIM SSM optimizes the use of network resources and reduces latency in transmitting multicast information PIM SSM reduces the complexity of the multicast routing infrastructure because it requires only a source based forwarding tree instead of an RP based shared tree infrastructure Access control is improved because a receiver that subscribes to a channel receives data from a specific source only How BayRS Implements SSM BayRS implements PIM SSM and IGMP Version 3 as follows IGMP Version 3 is backward compatible with IGMP Versions 2 and 1 a BayRS router running IGMP Version 3 supports Version 1 Version 2 and Version 3 hosts in the network IGMP Version 3 and Version 2 are implemented on a per interface basis Both versions can coexist on the same router If multiple routers share the same LAN all interfaces to that LAN must run the same version of IGMP if there are local IGMP group members BayRS routers support networks with PIM SM only PIM SSM only and mixed PIM SM PIM SSM environments SSM is implemented only on addresses within the configured SSM address range The default SSM address range is 232 0 0 0 through 232 255 255 255 You can configure other non overlapping SSM ranges for example 232 0 0 0 8 and 233 1 0 0 16 314470 15 6 Rev 00 13 3 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice With IGMP Version 3 enabled a
118. ameter Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID You use the following parameter to specify one or more BGP peers Outbound Peers Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt Policy Filters gt BGP 4 gt Announce Policies An empty list A list of IP addresses Specifies the BGP router ID of the peer To verify the router ID of the BGP peer on the peer router check the configured value for the Site Manager BGP Global parameter BGP Identifier or the BCC BGP parameter router id This policy applies to BGP advertisements authored by a router on this list and applies only to BGP sourced routes when BGP is included as a route source Specify one or more IP addresses Configure an empty list to indicate that this policy applies to BGP advertisements being sent to any peer 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 6 10 1 23 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 13 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice DSQMS RED Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID The Edit Red Parameters window Figure A 1 contains the RED parameters These parameters define a set of attributes for the RED function These instances of DSQMS RED are used by traffic classifiers in managed queues E Edit Red Parameters E x Done Add Apply Values Delete Help Figure A 1 Edit Red Parameters Window First Order Const Configuration Manager gt Protoco
119. an create outbound traffic filters for the following interfaces ATM Ethernet 1OBASE T or 1OOBASE T FDDI token ring HSSI MCE1 MCT1 FT1 FE1 and synchronous The BayRS Version 15 4 0 0 implementation of this feature has the following limitations e Supports traffic with IP headers only e Allows you to create traffic filters only the ability to create templates is not available e Does not allow you to change the order of precedence for outbound filters e Is not supported on X 25 interfaces e Is not supported on Data Link Switching DLSw interfaces 314470 15 6 Rev 00 16 1 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice The following sections describe how to use the BCC to enable protocol prioritization and configure outbound traffic filters Topic Page Configuring Protocol Prioritization 16 2 Customizing Protocol Prioritization 16 3 Creating Outbound Traffic Filters 16 8 You implement protocol prioritization by applying an outbound traffic filter that includes a prioritizing priority queue action This type of outbound traffic filter is called a priority filter The next section describes how to edit protocol prioritization parameters that affect the way priority filters work Configuring Protocol Prioritization To configure priority queues with default values do the following 1 Configure protocol priority on the circuit as described in this section 2 Apply outbound tr
120. an ATM Interface in Configuring ATM Services Defining the SVC Inactivity Timeout When you enable the SVC inactivity timeout function the default the router automatically terminates any SVCs that have not received or transmitted any cells If you disable the SVC inactivity timeout function all SVCs on the line remain open until you close them by another method When enabled the SVC inactivity timeout function also requires a timer value This timer value specifies how long you want the ATM router to wait before disabling inactive SVCs By default if the router does not receive or transmit any cells for 1200 seconds the inactive SVCs are disabled However you can set this timer to any value from 60 to 3600 seconds Using the BCC To disable the SVC inactivity timeout function navigate to the ATM prompt for example box atm 11 1 and enter vc inactivity control disabled For example the following command disables the SVC inactivity timeout function on the ATM interface atm 11 1 ve inactivity control disabled atm 11 1 To reenable the SVC inactivity timeout function navigate to the ATM prompt and enter vc inactivity control enabled Note The ve inactivity control parameter is not available for use with the ATM T3 E3 PMC module Instead the ve inact control parameter appears for this module The ve inact control parameter cannot be modified 3 8 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring ATM Services T
121. ardware platform for which you need documentation for example Multiprotocol Router 5430 Note The Passport 5430 and the Passport 2430 are now referred to as the Multiprotocol Router 5430 and the Multiprotocol Router 2430 5 From the Content list choose Documentation and then click on Go On the resulting documentation page you can use keywords or menu options to search for specific documents You can view print and download any document from the Web site 314470 15 6 Rev 00 1 1 Chapter 2 Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager Version 15 3 0 0 The following section is an amendment to Chapter 7 Monitoring Trap and Event Messages in Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager Changing the Trap Port for Multiple Network Management Applications If you are running more than one network management application on your Site Manager workstation you must configure Site Manager to receive trap messages from the SNMP agent on a port other than the default port 162 This is necessary for the following reasons The agent can only send trap messages to one network management application at a time Only one application can map to a UDP port at a time By default the network management application on your workstation is assigned to User Datagram Protocol UDP port 162 This port is dedicated to receiving SNMP trap messages from the SNMP agent Site Manager is the preferred network ma
122. arguments disabled enabled address lt address gt hame lt name gt lt name gt Displays information about disabled tunnels only Displays information about enabled tunnels only Displays information for tunnels configured with the specified IP address only Displays information for tunnels configured with the specified name only When you specify this filter displays both the filter flag and value that is long notation Displays information for tunnels configured with the specified tunnel name only When you specify this filter displays a value only that is short notation The output includes the following information Tunnel Name Local Address Local State Remote Endpoint Name Remote Endpoint Address Encaps Protocols Name assigned to the GRE tunnel IP address of the router interface on which the GRE tunnel is configured State of the router interface enabled or disabled Name assigned to the interface at the tunnel s remote end point IP address of the interface at the tunnel s remote end point Protocol for which the tunnel is configured 20 4 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Reference for BCC IP show Commands Keepalive Enabled State Timer Retries If enabled indicates that keepalives will be sent to the remote endpoint and keepalives received from that endpoint will be acted upon enabled or disabled State of the GRE connection up or down The state of a co
123. at there are no more local members For IGMP Version 3 this parameter specifies the maximum number of group and source specific queries sent before the router assumes that there are no listeners for a particular source By default this parameter is set to 2 If you reset the Robustness Variable parameter you should reset the Last Member Query Count to the same value as the Robustness Variable parameter 314470 15 6 Rev 00 13 13 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice To edit one or more IGMP fine tuning parameters complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 2 Choose IP The IP menu opens 3 Choose IGMP IGMP Relay The IGMP menu opens 4 Choose Interfaces The IGMP Interface Parameters window opens 5 Select the interface that you want to edit 6 Edit one or more of the following parameters e Robustness Variable Startup Query Interval Startup Query Count Last Member Query Interval Last Member Query Count Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 43 The values for that interface are displayed in the window 7 Click on Apply and then click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 13 14 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring IP Multicasting and Multimedia Services Configuring
124. ation window opens 7 Click on Done The ATM Configuration window opens 8 Click on ATM Line Attributes The ATM Line Driver Attributes window opens continued 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring ATM Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 9 Set the the following parameters as needed Enable Interface MTU Data Path Enable Data Path Notify Timeout Framing Mode Cell Scrambling Per VC Clipping DS3 Line Build Out Note The Cell Scrambling parameter value must be the same as for the other ATM devices on your network See your system administrator or your service provider for the appropriate value Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions in ATM Line Parameters on page A 3 10 Click on OK The ATM Configuration window opens 11 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 12 Go to Defining an ATM Service Record in Configuring ATM Services After you create the ATM circuit go to Chapter 2 Starting ATM and ATM Router Redundancy in Configuring ATM Services to finish configuring ATM services Configuring ATM Services also provides more information about ATM services and how to modify an existing ATM configuration 314470 15 6 Rev 00 3 7 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Version 15 3 0 0 The following sections contain amendments to Chapter 3 Customizing
125. c that matches the filter s match criteria will be sent 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring DLSw Services e action log specifies whether the router will send an entry to the system log file for traffic that matches the filter s match criteria To prepare to specify the filter action navigate to the peer s filter prompt for example box dilsw dlsw priority outbound filter lt filter_name gt lt peer_address gt and enter actions This action displays the priority outbound filter s actions prompt For example to display the actions prompt for a filter named dsap_O and02_q3 for a peer with an IP address of 192 168 1 1 navigate to the peer s filter prompt box disw disw priority outbound filter dsap_01and02_q3 192 168 1 1 and enter dlsw priority outbound filter dsap_0land02_q3 192 168 1 1 actions actions dsap_0land02_q3 192 168 1 1 Specifying the Queue Action To specify the priority queue for traffic that matches the filter s match criteria navigate to the peer filter s actions prompt for example box disw disw priority outbound filter lt filter_name gt lt peer_address gt actions and enter queue lt value gt lt value gt is the number of the DLSw priority queue for this filter Valid values are from 0 to 9 inclusive For example to specify queue 1 as the priority queue for a filter named dsap_Oland02_q3 for a peer with an IP address of 192 168 1 1 navigate to the filter s
126. ceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaes 6 14 DSQMS Configuration Steps eee tants Sree ios 6 15 Enabling DSGMS on an Interface ckdisniicrcinieininenidinuennae 6 15 Creating RED Instances for Use by Traffic Classifiers EET EE T ET 6 16 Creating DSQMS Queues and Associated Traffic Classifiers sleeaestteas 6 16 M difying RED Parameters vison carennanieimiucntannnniaanie 6 18 Modifying DSQMS Interface Parameters EA E tree Pere 6 19 Modifying DSQMS Queues 00 gi a Geese E ep tea cligeniectacne 6 20 Chapter 7 Configuring DLSw Services Version 15 5 0 soricina EPE PeO Aaa A DESENE ee ee eee ere eee fa Di Sve Protocol PF morte ci scsvscnesssesraespeianciesestreaan eas ani ETE ENARE ANO ENTEN NE 7 1 Configuring DLSw Protocol Prioritization SINE ING BOG miziainaina ate 7 2 Configuring and Enabling Global Parameters for DLSw Protocol Prioritization ieee 7 2 Customizing Global Parameters for DLSw Protocol Prioritization 00 7 2 max queue buffers unconfig peers PEPE E REE ie nate uaa 7 2 MAX QUEUE SIZE UNCONFIG PEOIS 0 2 2 eeeeeeeeeeeeseceeeeesseneeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeetneentestaes 7 3 pA WANE Ey UT e a AEE T patie sult aint seen EE EET watch atedupectiatbess 7 3 Enabling and Disabling DLSw Protocol Prioritization for Configured and Unconiig red PES goo xs sansacx dacesacdephaeGaemevvocsdadid pdtdtasnckieaasualvaten sSadewocaiadiels 7 4 Customizing and Enabling DLSw Priority Queues f
127. choose Protocols Choose PPP The Protocols menu opens 3 Choose Interfaces The PPP Interface List window opens 4 Click on the interface for which you want to enable disable multilink multiclass Set the Multilink MultiClass Enable parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on A 59 6 Click on Apply 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 14 4 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring PPP Services Specifying the Fragment Size for PPP Multilink Classes You specify the minimum size of a packet that Multilink will fragment for each class of the interface by setting the Fragment Size parameter on the PPP Multiclass Classes window shown in Figure 14 2 You can set the fragment size for each of the 6 classes x 0 through x 5 for the selected interface or you can use the default value 80 The six classes for the selected interface shown in Figure 14 2 are numbered 5 0 through 5 5 The fragment size is the minimum size of a packet to be fragmented for the selected class E PPP Multiclass Classes Done Apply Values Help Fragment Size Figure 14 2 Site Manager PPP Multiclass Classes Window 314470 15 6 Rev 00 14 5 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice To specify the fragment size for PPP multilink multiclass using Site Manager perform the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System res
128. configuration The type of VoIP equipment in use affects this value 9 18 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Frame Relay Services e Scaling limitations may apply on the number of PVCs that can be supported with FRF 12 on an interface or slot especially for routers such as the BN that provide VC aggregation in an end to end frame relay network These scaling limitations are affected by the processor speed the fragment size and the size of the data packet to be fragmented and the number of PVCs that implement FRF 12 on the slot Configuring FRF 12 Fragmentation and Interleaving To configure FRF 12 fragmentation and interleaving on the router you must enable traffic shaping and FRF 12 fragmentation on the frame relay PVCs and configure DSQMS parameters on the interface associated with the PVCs Note To implement FRF 12 fragmentation and interleaving you may also need to configure ingress traffic filters to mark VoIP packets with the EF DSCP For instructions on configuring ingress traffic filters see Chapter 3 of Configuring Differentiated Services part number 308620 14 20 Rev 00 You can use the BCC or Site Manager to configure FRF 12 fragmentation and interleaving on the router By default FRF 12 fragmentation and interleaving are disabled Configuration Steps To configure FRF 12 fragmentation and interleaving on the router perform the following steps These steps are described in detail in the following secti
129. ct the PIM modules for which you want to log info warning messages The modules that you select are represented as bits values in the parameter field as follows 0x00000001 Bootstrap procedure 0x00000002 Hello procedure 0x00000004 Join prune send procedure 0x00000008 Registration procedure 0x00000010 Maintaining PIM route table 0x00000020 Assert procedure 0x00000040 Data forwarding tree switching 0x00000080 PIM main gate processing 0x00000100 PIM Cct gate general processing 0x00000200 PIM route change processing 0x00000400 PIM G processing 0x00000800 PIM pte oif timers 0x00001000 PIM MTM signals messages 0x00002000 PIM PIM messages 0x00004000 PIM protocol messages first data 0x00008000 Join prune received 0x00010000 PIM utilities including timers 0x00020000 PIM SSM related messages MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 14 1 4 A 54 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Debug Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt PIM gt Global Default 0 Options 0 PIM modules for which you want to log PIM debug messages Function Enables or disables the logging of PIM debugging messages on the PIM router Instructions To disable logging of PIM debug messages accept the default value 0 To enable logging of these messages click on Values and select the PIM modules for which you want to log debug messages The modules that
130. d Chapter 6 Customizing Queue Management and Scheduling in Configuring Differentiated Services part number 308620 14 20 Rev 00 Beginning with Version 15 6 0 0 you can use Site Manager to configure DSQMS on the router Before Version 15 6 0 0 you could only use the BCC to configure DSQMS Note Using Site Manager you can configure DSQMS on PPP multiline and multilink bundles The BCC does not support multiline or multilink configuration However DSQMS traffic shaping is not supported on frame relay multiline multilink For an overview of queue management and scheduling see the following sections in Configuring Differentiated Services e Queue Management and Scheduling QMS in Chapter 1 e How DSQMS Elements Work Together in Chapter 2 Also see the earlier sections of this chapter in the Document Change Notice especially Implementation Notes on page 6 3 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Differentiated Services DSQMS Configuration Steps To start DSQMS on the router perform the following steps These steps are described in the following sections 1 Ifnecessary configure a circuit on a slot and connector 2 Enable DSQMS on the circuit Note For frame relay circuits you enable DSQMS on the default service record only You cannot enable DSQMS on any other service record 3 Create one or more sets of RED attributes that can be used by queues on the interfaces 4 Creat
131. d to calculate the amount of time that the router waits for a reply after sending a GRE keepalive message to a remote end point before declaring that the GRE tunnel is down You can use the BCC or Site Manager to change the value of the timer interval Using the BCC To change the default value of the GRE keepalive retries parameter for a remote tunnel end point navigate to the remote GRE tunnel interface prompt for example box tunnels gre boston remote endpoint austin and enter keepalive retries lt value gt value is an integer between 2 and 254 inclusive The default value is 3 It represents the number by which to multiply the currently configured value of the keepalive retry timeout interval For example if the keepalive retry timeout interval is set to 20 seconds and you set the keepalive retries value to 6 then the router waits for 120 seconds 6 x 20 seconds for a reply message before declaring that the GRE tunnel is down 314470 15 6 Rev 00 10 5 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice For example the following command sequence changes the keepalive retries value for the remote tunnel austin to 6 times the current value of the keepalive timer interval 20 and verifies the change remote endpoint austin keepalive retries 6 remote endpoint austin info address 192 168 2 4 keepalive enabled logical ip address 0 0 0 1 logical ipx address 000000000001 name austin keepalive retries 6 keepalive ret
132. d to end fragmentation format is based on the frame structure identified in the FRF 12 standard An NLPID of OxB1 is used to identify the end to end fragmentation format Each packet fragment has a separate sequence number When FRF 12 fragmentation is enabled packets are fragmented and reassembled as follows 1 Data fragments are created based on the configured fragment size The first fragment for a specific frame has the B Begin bit set and the last fragment has the E End bit set Every fragment in the series contains the same address octets that were on the original unfragmented frame including the frame relay congestion bits 2 The receiver for the PVC keeps track of the incoming sequence numbers and maintains the most recently received sequence number The receiver detects the end of a reassembled frame when it receives a fragment bearing the E End bit 3 Ifafragment is detected as missed on the receiving PVC the receiver discards all currently unassembled and subsequently received fragments for that packet until it receives the first fragment that bears the B Begin bit Note Any packet not marked with a DSCP of EF is fragmented even packets smaller than the configured fragment size these small packets contain the B Begin and E End bits in the same packet If you examine a trace of traffic from a frame relay link running FRF 12 the only traffic that is not fragmented is the EF marked VoIP packets In
133. ddress gt you enter ping 192 32 10 12 bold text Indicates command names and options and text that you need to enter Example Enter show ip alerts routes Example Use the dinfo command Xvi 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Preface braces Indicate required elements in syntax descriptions where there is more than one option You must choose only one of the options Do not type the braces when entering the command Example If the command syntax is show ip alerts routes you must enter either show ip alerts or show ip routes but not both brackets Indicate optional elements in syntax descriptions Do not type the brackets when entering the command Example If the command syntax is show ip interfaces alerts you can enter either show ip interfaces or show ip interfaces alerts italic text Indicates new terms book titles and variables in command syntax descriptions Where a variable is two or more words the words are connected by an underscore Example If the command syntax is show at lt valid_route gt valid_route is one variable and you substitute one value for it separator gt Shows menu paths Example Protocols gt IP identifies the IP option on the Protocols menu vertical line Separates choices for command keywords and arguments Enter only one of the choices Do not type the vertical line when entering the command Example If the command syntax is show ip alerts
134. disable rip1 comp enter rip 10 1 1 2 rip1 comp disable rip 10 1 1 2 To have RIP 1 accept RIP 1 broadcast and RIP 2 broadcast packets only RIP 1 will not accept RIP 2 multicast packets and have RIP 2 broadcast the packets making it compatible with RIP 1 go to the RIP interface prompt for example box eth 2 2 ip 10 1 1 2 255 255 0 0 rip and enter rip1 comp enable 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring IP ARP RARP RIP and OSPF Services For example to enable ripl comp enter rip 10 1 1 2 rip1 comp enable rip 10 1 1 2 Using Site Manager To have RIP 1 accept both RIP 1 broadcast and RIP 2 multicast packets and have RIP 2 always use multicast for transmitting updates or to have RIP 1 accept RIP 1 and RIP 2 broadcast packets only complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens Choose IP The IP menu opens Choose RIP Interfaces The IP RIP Interface Configuration window opens Click on the RIP interface that you want to edit The parameter values for that interface appear in the IP RIP Interface Configuration window Set the Rip Compatible parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 65 Click on Apply and then click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 314470 15 6 Rev 00
135. dit RADIUS Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables the RADIUS client on the gateway Set to Enable to activate the RADIUS client on the router Accept the default value Disable to deactivate RADIUS authentication 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 22 1 1 2 Accounting Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt Global Protocols gt RADIUS gt Create RADIUS gt Add or Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt Global Protocols gt RADIUS gt Edit RADIUS Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables RADIUS accounting Set to Enable to activate RADIUS accounting Accept the default value Disable to deactivate RADIUS accounting 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 22 1 1 3 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 63 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Client IP Address Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt Global Protocols gt RADIUS gt Create RADIUS gt Add or Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt Global Protocols gt RADIUS gt Edit RADIUS gt Edit None A 32 bit IP address Identifies the RADIUS client This address applies to the entire router Enter the IP address of the router If the RADIUS server is already configured Site Manager automatically supplies the address 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 22 1 1 5 Debug Message Level Configuration Manager gt
136. dure within the Using Traffic Shaping section in Chapter 4 and adds the parameter description to Appendix A Site Manager Parameters Using Traffic Shaping Site Manager To enable traffic shaping complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Edit Connector window opens click on a port configured for frame relay 2 Click on Edit Circuit 3 Click on Services The Frame Relay Circuit Definition window opens The Frame Relay Service List window opens continued 314470 15 6 Rev 00 9 1 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Site Manager Procedure continued 4 You do this Select the appropriate service record and click on PVCs System responds The FR PVC List for Service window opens Click on a PVC that you want to configure for traffic shaping Set the following parameters Committed Burst e Excess Burst e Throughput e Bw Threshold Click on Help or see the parameter description in Frame Relay PVC Parameters on page A 27 Click on Done You return to the Frame Relay Service List window Click on Done You return to the Frame Relay Circuit Definition window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Version 15 2 0 0 The following section describes a limitation that was omitted
137. e dequeuing algorithm to strict protocol priority ethernet 2 1 prioritization algorithm type strict protocol priority ethernet 2 1 16 6 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization Selecting the High Queue Percentage Bandwidth If you selected the bandwidth allocation dequeuing algorithm to specify the percentage of the synchronous line s bandwidth allocated to traffic that has been sent to the High queue navigate to the protocol priority prompt for example box ethernet 2 1 protocol priority and enter high queue percentage bandwidth lt percent percent is a value between 0 to 100 inclusive The default is 70 percent When you set this parameter to a value less than 100 each time the percentage of bandwidth used by high priority traffic reaches this limit the router transmits traffic in the Normal and Low queues up to the configured percentages for those priority queues The high queue normal queue and low queue percentage bandwidth values must total 100 For example the following command changes the high queue percentage bandwidth to 50 percent protocol priority ethernet 2 1 high queue percentage bandwidth 50 protocol priority ethernet 2 1 Selecting the Normal Queue Percentage Bandwidth If you selected the bandwidth allocation dequeuing algorithm to specify the percentage of the synchronous line s bandwidth allocated to normal priority traffic navigate to the protoco
138. e interface you do not configure DSQMS directly on a PVC 314470 15 6 Rev 00 9 5 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice The combination of traffic shaping and DSQMS queuing and scheduling enhances QoS over frame relay virtual circuits and enables you to monitor traffic statistics for individual virtual circuits using DSQMS MIB attributes This feature is supported on all frame relay interfaces other than dial and multiline multilink interfaces across all BayRS router platforms e At the frame relay level DSQMS enforces the following behavior All IP packets including router generated IP packets from shaped PVCs are classified on the basis of DSCP values and queued accordingly Non IP packets receive best effort treatment Each PVC uses two reserved queues IntQ1 and IntQ2 as well as queues that you configure Statistics are reported for up to eight configurable queues only e At the driver interface level DSQMS enforces the following behavior All packets from shaped PVCs are placed in the frame relay shaped queue Packets from non shaped PVCs are classified on the basis of DSCP values and queued accordingly For information about configuring traffic shaping for frame relay PVCs see Chapters 1 and 4 in Configuring Frame Relay Services as well as Using Traffic Shaping Site Manager on page 9 1 For information about configuring DSQMS see Chapters 2 and 6 in Configuring Different
139. e one or more queues on the interface 5 Create one or more traffic classifiers on each queue For information and instructions on configuring a circuit on a slot and connector see Configuring WAN Line Services or Configuring Ethernet FDDI and Token Ring Services Enabling DSQMS on an Interface After you successfully configure a new circuit the Select Protocols window opens Proceed as follows Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Inthe Select Protocols window select DSQMS 2 Click on OK The Edit DSQMS Parameters window opens 3 If necessary set the following parameters e Debug Level e Dequeue At Line Rate Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 17 4 Click on Apply then click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 314470 15 6 Rev 00 6 15 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Creating RED Instances for Use by Traffic Classifiers Each instance of DSQMS RED defines a set of attributes for use in traffic classifiers that are associated with DSQMS queues To create RED instances perform the following steps Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens Set the following parameters e First Order Const e Second Order Const e Min Threshold e Max Threshold Click on Help or see the
140. e parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 33 Click on Apply The transmission of GRE keepalive messages is enabled or disabled for the selected tunnel end point Setting the Timeout Interval for GRE Keepalive Messages When you enable the GRE keepalive message functionality the timeout interval is set to 10 seconds by default The timeout interval is the amount of time in seconds that the router waits between sending successive keepalive messages from a GRE tunnel s local end point to one of its remote end points You can use the BCC or Site Manager to change the value of the timeout interval 314470 15 6 Rev 00 10 3 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Using the BCC To change the default value of the GRE keepalive retry timeout interval for a GRE tunnel s remote end point navigate to the remote GRE tunnel interface prompt for example box tunnels gre boston remote endpoint austin and enter keepalive retry timeout lt va ue gt value is an integer between 1 and 32766 inclusive It represents the number of seconds that the router waits between sending successive GRE keepalive messages from the GRE tunnel s local end point to one of its remote end points For example the following command sequence changes the keepalive retry timeout interval for the remote tunnel austin to 20 seconds and verifies the change remote endpoint austin keepalive retry tim
141. e relay PVC A 28 Cc clocking signal source ATM specifying 3 10 command files BCC 24 1 Committed Burst parameter frame relay PVC A 27 compression IP payload only See IP payload compression configuration files saving in dynamic mode 21 8 upgrading 21 8 conventions text xvii customer support xx D daylight savings time setting using the Technician Interface 23 2 Index 1 Debug parameter IGMP global A 36 PIM global A 55 default route cost setting using the Technician Interface 23 1 diagnostic PROMs upgrading and verifying 21 4 Directed Broadcast parameter description IP global A 47 DLSw data link switching protocol prioritization 7 1 DS 3 cell scrambling 3 11 DSCP tagging for router generated packets 6 5 6 8 6 12 DSQMS configuring with Site Manager 6 14 implementation notes 6 3 interoperability with protocol prioritization 6 11 6 13 reserved queue types 6 10 used for frame relay traffic shaping 9 5 DSQMS line speed specifying 8 1 DSQMS parameter descriptions interface parameters A 16 queue classifier parameters A 25 queue parameters A 19 RED parameters A 14 DSQMS RED parameter descriptions BCC 6 1 E E3 cell scrambling 3 11 echo requests ICMP enabling and disabling unique identifiers for 11 5 ECMP equal cost multipath enabling for PIM SSM 13 10 Enable parameter IGMP global A 35 IGMP interface A 39 Equal Cost Multipath parameter PIM global
142. e to activate the transmission of GRE keepalive messages between a MIB Object ID GRE tunnel s local endpoint and one of its configured remote tunnel endpoints Set to disable to stop the transmission of GRE keepalive messages between a GRE tunnel s local endpoint and one of its configured remote tunnel endpoints 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 28 1 8 You use the following parameter to specify the number of seconds you want the router to wait before sending another keepalive packet from the GRE tunnel s local endpoint to its remote endpoint Parameter Path Keepalive Retry Timeout Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt GRE gt Remote Conn Default 10 seconds Options 1 to 32 766 seconds Function Specifies the amount of time in seconds that the router waits between sending successive keepalive packets from the GRE tunnel s local endpoint to the GRE tunnel s remote endpoint Instructions Specify the number of seconds you want the router to wait before sending MIB Object ID another keepalive packet from the GRE tunnel s local endpoint to its remote endpoint 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 28 1 9 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 33 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID You use the following parameter to specify the amount of time that the router waits for a reply to a GRE keepalive message before it declares that
143. eating the filter For example to create a DLSw outbound filter named dsap_Oland02_q3 for a DLSw peer with an IP address of 192 168 1 1 navigate to the global dlsw prompt for example box dilsw and enter disw priority outbound filter name dsap_01to02_q3 peer ip addr 192 168 1 1 Enabling and Disabling DLSw Outbound Filters By default an outbound filter is enabled when you create it Disabling an Outbound Filter To disable a DLSw priority filter navigate to the peer s filter prompt for example box disw disw priority outbound filter lt filter_name gt lt peer_address gt and enter state disabled For example to disable a DLSw outbound filter named dsap_Oland02_q3 for a peer with an IP address of 192 168 1 1 navigate to the peer s filter prompt box disw disw priority outbound filter dsap_01and02_q3 192 168 1 1 and enter dlsw priority outbound filter dsap_0land02_q3 192 168 1 1 state disabled dlsw priority outbound filter dsap_0land02_q3 192 168 1 1 Enabling an Outbound Filter To enable a DLSw priority filter again navigate to the peer s filter prompt for example box dlsw disw priority outbound filter lt filter_name gt lt peer_address gt and enter state enabled For example to enable a DLSw outbound filter named dsap_Oland02_q3 for a peer with an IP address of 192 168 1 1 navigate to the peer s filter prompt box disw disw priority outbound filter dsap_01and02_q 192 168 1 1 and ent
144. edit DSQMS queue parameters perform the following steps Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens Choose DSQMS The DSQMS menu opens 3 Choose Interface The Edit DSQMS Parameters window opens Select the interface that has the DSQMS queue that you want to edit Click on Queues The Edit DSQMS Queue List window opens 6 Select the queue that you want to edit Edit queue parameters as needed Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 19 Click on Apply and then click on Done You return to the Edit DSQMS Parameters window Click on Restart When you edit parameters for a DSQMS queue you must restart DSQMS on the interface for the changes to take effect 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 6 20 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Chapter 7 Configuring DLSw Services Version 15 5 0 0 The following section supplements Chapter 4 Customizing DLSw Services in Configuring DLSw Services DLSw Protocol Prioritization DLSw protocol prioritization is an outbound filtering mechanism that enables you to assign preference to specific types of traffic supported by DLSw DLSw protocol prioritization does not affect traffic as it enters the router but affects the sequence in which traffic exits the router
145. eepalive messages between a tunnel s local end point and one of its remote tunnel end points navigate to the remote GRE tunnel interface prompt for example box tunnels gre boston remote endpoint austin and enter keepalive lt state gt state is one of the following enabled disabled default For example the following command sequence enables transmission of GRE keepalive messages between the local end point and the remote end point austin and verifies the change remote endpoint austin keepalive enabled remote endpoint austin info address 192 168 2 4 keepalive enabled logical ip address 0 0 0 1 logical ipx address 000000000001 name austin keepalive retries 3 keepalive retry timeout 10 state enabled 10 2 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring GRE NAT RIPSO and BFE Services Using Site Manager To enable and disable the transmission of GRE keepalive messages between a tunnel s local end point and one of its configured remote end points complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 2 Choose IP The IP menu opens 3 Choose GRE Click on Remote Conn The GRE Create Tunnels List window opens The GRE Remote Connections List window opens Select the remote tunnel end point that you want to disable or reenable from the list Set the Keepaliv
146. elect a different best effort queue You cannot configure flow fairness on the best effort queue To override the default selection of the best effort queue select Yes or No 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 16 2 1 7 A 20 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Priority Level Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt DSQMS gt Interface gt Queues 0 0 through 29 Sets the priority level for this queue 0 is the highest priority This parameter applies to priority queues only To reset the priority level for this queue specify a value from 0 through 29 The value 0 is the highest priority 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 16 2 1 8 Time Quantum Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt DSQMS gt Interface gt Queues 100 0 through 5000 Specifies the maximum amount of time in milliseconds that this queue is allowed to transmit data before the router must service other queues priority and weighted This parameter applies to priority queues only To reset the maximum number of milliseconds that this queue is allowed to transmit data enter a value from 0 through 5000 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 16 2 1 9 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 21 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Parameter Packet Limit Path Configuration Manager gt P
147. ems can occur Note that ATM devices with different settings for scrambling cannot communicate For example if you configure a router to enable scrambling and configure a hub to disable scrambling the router and the hub cannot communicate If you select On be sure to enable scrambling for all devices on the network If you select Off be sure to disable scrambling for all devices on the network 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 3 2 1 22 Per VC Clipping Configuration Manager gt ATM1 gt ATM Line Attributes Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables cell clipping on a per VC basis Accept the default Disable for normal VC clipping Enable this parameter if you want to clip cells on a per VC basis 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 3 1 1 17 A 6 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID DS3 Line Build Out Configuration Manager gt ATM1 gt ATM Line Attributes Short Short Long Conditions router signals to mitigate attenuation which depends on the physical length of the line You can set this parameter only for DS3 modules Select Short for lines shorter than 225 feet select Long for lines 225 feet or longer 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 3 2 1 23 ATM Port Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID You use the following parameters to configure the ATM T3 E3 interface on the Passport 5430
148. eneeeeeeeeeeees TEE EE E A E XX How to Get Help ia E E T XX Chapter 1 BayRS Online Library CD Accessing Nortel Networks Documentation on the Web sssseecssseserirsesrirrserrirrserernss 1 1 Chapter 2 Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager S OT O a teadgaqa we pesadaventeiadagaeieladaieeiandanigectidnactiidastaane 2 1 Changing the Trap Port for Multiple Network Management Applications 2 1 Chapter 3 Configuring ATM Services version TSG soricina senn nai nA ES ERa AIEEE sceeeabaquseete 3 1 Creating an ATM Circuit for a T3 or E3 Connection on a papi 5430 esras 3 1 Specifying the Cable Length sessseseseessssesseeresssssnsnssresnseesnsens TE 3 2 Specifying the Clear Alarm Threshold cccccescsceeeeseeeeeneeeeesaeeeeeneeeteaeeeseaees 3 2 Specifying the Line Coding Method cccceeesceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeteteeeseaees 3 3 Specifying the LING TYPE sccscssccsccccccscenescccagaersssceeee aeeaneaes griieadaxavennstes E EEA 3 3 Speciiving the Logpback Mode secncarseniraninnnene en 3 3 Defining the Interface MTU scisciccinatisssastinsissatiantioiadsiuathiadsimelianmesieladsatiaanvens 3 4 Defining the Primary Clock Source ssseessseeeseeseeereern abana aa 3 4 Specifying the Setup Alarm Threshold cc ccccceeeceeeeeeeeceseeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeenanes 3 5 Disabling and Reenabling the ATM interface PE E PE 3 5 314470 15 6 Rev 00 v PERSON is eiO ON EN EOE AAE EE
149. eout 20 remote endpoint austin info address 192 168 2 4 keepalive enabled logical ip address 0 0 0 1 logical ipx address 000000000001 name austin keepalive retries 3 keepalive retry timeout 20 state enabled Using Site Manager To change the default value of the GRE keepalive retry timeout interval for a remote tunnel end point complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Protocols menu opens choose Protocols 2 Choose IP The IP menu opens 3 Choose GRE The GRE Create Tunnels List window opens 4 Click on Remote Conn The GRE Remote Connections List window opens continued 10 4 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring GRE NAT RIPSO and BFE Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 5 Select the remote tunnel end point for which you want to set the keepalive retry timeout interval value from the list 6 Set the Keepalive Retry Timeout parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 33 7 Click on Apply The GRE keepalive timer is set for the selected tunnel end point Setting the Keepalive Retries Parameter for GRE Keepalive Messages When you enable the GRE keepalive message functionality the value of the keepalive retries parameter is set to 3 by default The keepalive retries parameter is the multiplier use
150. er dlsw priority outbound filter dsap_0land02_q 192 168 1 1 state enabled 314470 15 6 Rev 00 7 9 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice dlsw priority outbound filter dsap_Oland02_q 192 168 1 1 Specifying Match Criteria for DLSw Priority Outbound Filters For DLSw priority outbound filters you can specify SAP source and destination addresses and MAC source and destination addresses as match criteria Traffic that matches the configured match criteria for a filter is handled according to the configured filter actions Note The BCC does not support the use of predefined match criteria for FID2 and FID4 frames in DLSw outbound filters in Version 15 5 0 0 or earlier However Site Manager supports the use of these predefined match criteria To prepare to specify the filtering match criteria navigate to the peer s filter prompt for example box disw disw priority outbound filter lt filter_name gt lt peer_address gt and enter match This action displays the priority outbound filter s match prompt For example to display the match prompt for a filter named dsap_O and02_q3 for a peer with an IP address of 192 168 1 1 navigate to the peer s filter prompt box disw disw priority outbound filter dsap_01and02_q3 192 168 1 1 and enter dlsw priority outbound filter dsap_0land02_q3 192 168 1 1 match match dsap_0Oland02_q3 192 168 1 1 Specifying MAC destination addresses To specify a MAC dest
151. er see Configuring ATM Services Specifying the Loopback Mode To force the interface into loopback mode so that the far end or intermediate equipment can perform diagnostics on the network between that equipment and the T3 E3 interface navigate to the ATM interface prompt for example box atm 1 1 2 1 atm e3 and enter loopback mode lt type gt 314470 15 6 Rev 00 3 3 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice type is payloadloop or lineloop If you select payloadloop the received signal at this interface is looped through the device Typically the received signal is looped back for retransmission after it has passed through the device s framing function If you select lineloop the received signal at this interface does not go through the framing device minimum penetration but is looped back out The default is noloop For example the following command changes the loopback mode to payloadloop atm e3 1 1 2 1 loopback mode payloadloop atm e3 1 1 2 1 Defining the Interface MTU The maximum transmission unit MTU is the largest possible unit of data that the physical medium can transmit By default the interface allows an MTU size of 4608 octets This value can handle most packet sizes However you can set the MTU to any value from 3 through 4608 octets To modify the interface MTU navigate to the ATM interface prompt for example box atm 1 1 2 1 atm e3 and enter mtu lt integer gt integer is
152. er will ensure that anyone who uses the Software does so only in compliance with the terms of this Agreement Customer shall not a use copy modify transfer or distribute the Software except as expressly authorized b reverse assemble reverse compile reverse engineer or otherwise translate the Software c create derivative works or modifications unless expressly authorized or d sublicense rent or lease the Software Licensors of intellectual property to Nortel Networks are beneficiaries of this provision Upon termination or breach of the license by Customer or in the event designated hardware or CFE is no longer in use Customer will promptly return the Software to Nortel Networks or certify its destruction Nortel Networks may audit by remote polling or other reasonable means to determine Customer s Software activation or usage levels If suppliers of third party software included in Software require Nortel Networks to include additional or different terms Customer agrees to abide by such terms provided by Nortel Networks with respect to such third party software 2 Warranty Except as may be otherwise expressly agreed to in writing between Nortel Networks and Customer Software is provided AS IS without any warranties conditions of any kind NORTEL NETWORKS DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES CONDITIONS FOR THE SOFTWARE EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICUL
153. erfaces The BCC does not support priority filters on the LAN interfaces To direct packets that match the filter criteria and ranges to the High queue navigate to the actions prompt for example box serial 3 1 protocol priority ip outbound filter lt filter_name gt actions and enter action high queue To direct packets that match the filter criteria and ranges to the Low queue navigate to the actions prompt for example box serial 3 1 protocol priority ip outbound filter lt filter_name gt actions and enter action low queue To use the length of packets to determine the priority queue navigate to the actions prompt for example box serial 3 1 protocol priority ip outbound filter lt fi ter_name gt actions and use the following procedure 1 Enter the following command action length The actions prompt is re displayed for example actions ip outbound filter test S31 314470 15 6 Rev 00 16 21 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice 2 At the actions prompt enter prioritization length The prioritization length prompt is displayed for example prioritization length ip outbound filter test S31 3 Enter one of the following commands greater than queue lt greater_than_queue_value gt less than or equal queue lt ess_than_or_equal_queue_value gt packet length lt packet_length_value gt greater_than_queue_value specifies which queue a packet is placed in if its packe
154. ersion 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Version 15 6 0 0 The following sections contain additions and amendments to Configuring Differentiated Services part number 308620 14 20 Rev 00 Topic Page Mapping of Router Generated Protocol Packets to DSCPs 6 12 Interoperability of Protocol Prioritization and DSQMS 6 13 Using Site Manager to Configure DSQMS 6 14 Mapping of Router Generated Protocol Packets to DSCPs The DSCPs for several protocols have been changed for Version 15 6 0 0 The following section revises Table 6 2 on page 6 6 For complete information about DSCP tagging of router generated packets see DSCP Tagging for Router Generated Packets on page 6 5 Beginning with Version 15 6 0 0 protocol packets originating from the BayRS router are marked with the DSCP tags markings shown in Table 6 4 These markings are not configurable they are hard coded and cannot be changed Table 6 4 Mapping of BayRS Protocols to DSCPs Traffic Category NNSC Network Protocol DSCP Scheduler Critical Control Critical COPS frame relay CS7 111000 Strict Priority LMI LCP Echo Request MOSPF Hello OSPF Hello PPP LQR Network Control Network BGP BootP DHCP CS6 110000 Strict Priority DNS DVMRP EGP MOSPF OSPF PIM SM RIP VRRP Interactive Platinum IPEX AF41 100010 User Configurable Responsive Silver DLSw ICMP IGMP AF
155. ervice record You can add DSQMS only to the default service record 5 Choose Protocols gt Add Delete The Select Protocols window opens In the Select Protocols window select DSQMS and click on OK The Edit DSQMS Parameters window opens If necessary set the following parameters e Debug Level e Dequeue At Line Rate Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 17 Click on Restart When you edit parameters for a DSQMS interface you must restart DSQMS on the interface for the changes to take effect Click on Done You return to the Frame Relay Service List window 10 Click on Done You return to the Frame Relay Circuit Definition window 11 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 9 24 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Frame Relay Services Configuring Traffic Shaping on the Frame Relay PVCs If traffic shaping is already configured go to the next section Configuring FRE 12 Fragmentation on the Frame Relay PVCs on page 9 26 To enable traffic shaping complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on a port configured for frame relay The Edit Connector window opens 2 Click on Edit Circuit The Frame Relay Circuit Definition window opens 3 Click on Services The Frame Relay Service Li
156. es Configuring IP Exterior Gateway Protocols BGP and EGP Configuring IP Multicasting and Multimedia Services Configuring PPP Services Configuring RADIUS Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization Configuring VRRP Services Configuring X 25 Services 314470 15 6 Rev 00 XV BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice e Quick Starting Routers e Reference for BCC IP show Commands e Upgrading Routers to BayRS Version 15 x e Using Technician Interface Scripts e Using Technician Interface Software e Using the Bay Command Console BCC Before You Begin Before using this guide you must complete the following procedures For a new router e Install the router see the installation guide that came with your router e Connect the router to the network and create a pilot configuration file see Quick Starting Routers Configuring Remote Access for AN and Passport ARN Routers or Connecting ASN Routers to a Network Make sure that you are running the latest version of Nortel Networks BayRS and Site Manager software For information about upgrading BayRS and Site Manager see the upgrading guide for your version of BayRS Text Conventions This guide uses the following text conventions angle brackets lt gt Indicate that you choose the text to enter based on the description inside the brackets Do not type the brackets when entering the command Example If the command syntax is ping lt i p_a
157. etnnarzenepninazummntmnusterenaneaieneasarese TS ereipoirosraiaais P 16 1 Configuring IP Outbound Traffic Filters Using the BCC essees 16 1 Configuring Protocol Prioritization ciispsaddananioaadoun tessa niah Mnaaaxsomnnaalaens 16 2 Customizing Protocol PriaritiZAlon sinssnreriireuniientannn aa nn 16 3 Creating Outbound Traffic Filters ccccecsceeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseaeeeseeeeeaes 16 8 Chapter 17 Configuring VRRP Services E s i E EA a AEE E A E A E E E E A T 17 1 Enabling or Disaping YRRP PINO scassi 17 1 Chapter 18 Configuring X 25 Services vonon T940 ensani Ai E E E E E 18 1 Enabling the QLLC XID Retry Feature eriedbosmeenneds EEE geneaae ee a 18 1 Setting the LLO Connect TIMET siioriseienunaasnes anionen ieina 18 2 Accepting Incoming X 25 Calls for QLLC Service alibi E E A 18 2 RET E E A N ele A ees 18 2 Chapter 19 Quick Starting Routers version 18 30 sect cisssescecetiagautetnsarancepusiapanunciaarsmeceniaaueectnarane ere sthiooteumrenonees RE 19 1 SPARCstation System Racultemante pita VEAN E E E N sess 19 1 HP 9000 Workstation System Requirements sesesseeesiessreeseresrresrineerensrrnserens 19 2 Chapter 20 Reference for BCC IP show Commands SO 19 aaa sanavenitectepnelvarteonsassaemnsaecmbaned E eave 20 1 Modified Output for the GRE Kaspal iuhanisi sheets saeia Sosanee eesiingudeestectennes 20 1 show gre logicalip Aunnels gee en eee ee eer ere Rere eee Ter eee ery eer ANNEER
158. etwork FRF 9 data compression is supported on all frame relay interfaces other than dial and multiline multilink interfaces across all BayRS router platforms FRF 9 is configurable on a per VC basis and is disabled by default Caution Software data compression including the BayRS implementation of FRF 9 is a computationally intensive operation On high speed interfaces a router may have insufficient resources to sustain the compressed data stream Configure FRF 9 compression on slow speed lines only lines not exceeding the El rate The BayRS implementation of FRF 9 is based on the Stac LZS algorithm and the compression control protocol is based on the Data Compression Protocol DCP as recommended in the FRF 9 specification The combination of the Stac LZS compression algorithm and the DCP handshake protocol is referred to as LZS DCP and is specified in Annex A of the FRF 9 standard The Data Compression Protocol includes these PDUs e DCP control PDUs used in the handshake procedure between the peers e DCP data PDUs carry the compressed or uncompressed payload DCP also includes support for anti expansion and synchronization procedures 314470 15 6 Rev 00 9 9 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice An FRE 9 frame contains a DCP header and DCP payload and is identified with a network layer protocol identifier NLPID of 0xBO For complete information about FRF 9 data compression see Data Compression
159. fault Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Throughput Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt Frame Relay gt Services gt PVCs 0 0 to 2147483647 b s Specifies the rate in bits per second at which data travels over this VC when no congestion is occurring To enable traffic shaping this parameter and the Committed Burst parameter must be set to values greater than zero Your carrier supplies the CIR or throughput value which you enter in this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 2 1 18 Bw Threshold Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt Frame Relay gt Services gt PVCs 0 0 to maximum physical line speed bits s Specifies the bandwidth threshold that you want to set for this PVC for traffic shaping purposes To minimize starvation of normal and low priority traffic over a high speed physical line such as a 56 Kb s lines over HSSI set the bandwidth threshold to a value 3 to 10 times that set for the Throughput CIR parameter Otherwise accept the default 0 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 2 1 58 A 28 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters You use the following parameters to configure FRF 9 compression on a frame relay PVC Parameter FRE 9 Enable Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt Frame Relay gt Services gt PVCs Default Disable Options Enable Disable Function Enables or disable
160. fault Enable MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 7 1 18 A 50 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters OSPF Global Parameter Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Use the following parameter to enable RFC 3101 forwarding address compatibility for an OSPF NSSA Rfc 3101 Compatibility Enable Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt OSPF MOSPE gt Global Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables RFC 3101 forwarding address compatibility for the OSPF NSSA The setting for this parameter takes effect after restarting OSPF globally Set to Enable if you want to use the forwarding address functionality and specify an ASE forwarding address for type 7 link state advertisements LSAs If this parameter is not enabled any forwarding address specified in the NSSA Forward Address parameter is ignored 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 3 1 37 OSPF Area Parameter Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Use the following parameter to specify the autonomous system external ASE forwarding address of the type 7 NSSA link state database LSDB NSSA Forward Address Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt OSPF MOSPF gt Areas None Any valid IP address in the network Specifies the forwarding address for type 7 link state advertisements LSAs Enter the IP address of the interface to be used as the ASE forwardi
161. fferent from the reported MAC address the router replaces the old MAC address with the new one The interface then checks for the message type request or reply If the router cannot find the MAC address in the translation table it discards the message 314470 15 6 Rev 00 11 1 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Version 15 4 0 0 The following sections are amendments to Configuring IP ARP RARP RIP and OSPF Services Defining BGP Peers for BGP OSPF and RIP Announce Policies When defining a BGP peer for an announce policy the peer must be identified by its BGP router ID To verify the router ID of the BGP peer on the peer router check the configured value for the Site Manager BGP Global parameter BGP Identifier or the BCC BGP parameter router id For information about supplying a router ID for a BGP router see Configuring IP Exterior Gateway Protocols BGP and EGP Importing RIP Updates You can now select whether the router imports RIP 1 updates only RIP 2 updates only or both RIP 1 and RIP 2 updates from a neighbor router The following procedures describe how to configure this feature using the BCC and Site Manager Using the BCC To have RIP 1 accept both RIP 1 broadcast and RIP 2 multicast packets and have RIP 2 always use multicast for transmitting updates go to the RIP interface prompt for example box eth 2 2 ip 10 1 1 2 255 255 0 0 rip and enter rip1 comp disable For example to
162. ffic Filters 16 18 Specifying Match Criteria for P to Frame Relay Outbound Traffic Filters 16 18 Specifying the Action of Outbound Traffic Filters 16 19 Specifying User Defined Criteria 16 24 Creating a Filter for IP Routed Packets To create an outbound traffic filter for P routed packets navigate to the protocol priority prompt for example box serial 3 1 protocol priority and enter ip outbound filter lt filter_name gt filter_name is a descriptive name for the filter For example use the name drop_telnet_s31 for a filter that drops outbound Telnet traffic on a serial module in slot 3 connector 1 For example the following command creates an outbound filter with the name drop_telnet_s31 protocol priority serial 3 1 ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 Displaying Priority Outbound Filter Parameter Values To view the current values of the outbound filter navigate to the traffic filter prompt for example box serial 3 1 protocol priority ip outbound filter lt filter_name gt and enter info 314470 15 6 Rev 00 16 9 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice For example the following command shows the current parameter values for the priority outbound filter ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 info filter name drop_telnet_s31 state enabled ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 Enabling or Disabling the Outbound Filter When you create an
163. following command pri ip ip tcp established on off 16 16 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization Example In this example the router filters packets with the ACK and RESET bits in the TCP header turned on match ip ip ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 pri ip ip tcp established on match ip ip ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 Specifying Match Criteria for IP to Source Routing Outbound Traffic Filters To prepare to specify the filtering criteria navigate to the match ip ip prompt for example box serial 3 1 protocol priority ip outbound filter lt filter_name gt match ip ip and enter match ip source routing Specifying SSAPs as Match Criteria To filter on a range of session service access points SSAPs navigate to the match ip source routing prompt for example box serial 3 1 protocol priority ip outbound filter lt filter_name gt match ip ip match ip source routing and enter the following command pri ip sr ssap lt range gt range specifies any number of session service access points SSAPs It can also specify ranges of SSAPs Specifying Source and Destination Networks As Match Criteria To filter on source and destination networks go to the match ip source routing prompt for example for example box serial 3 1 protocol priority ip outbound filter lt fi ter_name gt match ip ip match ip source routing and enter the following comma
164. frediag exe from the Site Manager PC or workstation to the router s flash card by using the tftp command For more information about the tftp command see Using Technician Interface Software 4 Update the boot PROM by entering prom w lt volume_no gt lt Boot_PROM_source_file gt lt slot_ID gt volume_no is the slot number of the boot PROM source file Boot_PROM_source_file is the name of the boot PROM source file for example freboot exe slot_ID is the slot location of the boot PROM that you want to update For AN ANH or ARN routers the slot_ID is always 1 Note To update the boot PROM on the Passport 2430 router copy the latest pp2430boot ppc file to the PCMCIA card along with the image This router does not require that the boot code be burned in to the PROM For example enter the following command prom w 2 freboot exe 3 This command erases the boot PROM image on slot 3 and copies the contents of the freboot exe file on volume 2 to the PROM on slot 3 Note After you enter the prom command it must run to completion The Control c abort command is disabled for the duration of the prom command execution Updating takes from 2 through 10 minutes per PROM Verifying takes up to 2 minutes per PROM 5 Update the diagnostic PROM by entering prom w lt volume_no gt lt Diag_PROM_source_file gt lt slot_ID gt volume_no is the slot number of the diagnostic PROM source file
165. from Configuring Frame Relay Services Deleting PVCs from Service Records The section Deleting PVCs from Service Records in Configuring Frame Relay Services should include the statement that Site Manager does not allow users to delete or move the last PVC in the only non default service record If you want to delete or move the last PVC you must remove the entire service record 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Frame Relay Services Version 15 6 0 0 The following sections contain additions or amendments to Configuring Frame Relay Services part number 308624 15 0 Rev 00 Topic Page Virtual Circuit Monitoring with the ifSpeed MIB Attribute 9 3 Frame Relay Traffic Shaping with DSQMS 9 5 Configuring FRE 9 Compression 9 9 Configuring FRF 12 Fragmentation and Interleaving 9 15 Virtual Circuit Monitoring with the ifSpeed MIB Attribute The following section contains amendments to Chapter 4 Customizing PVCs in Configuring Frame Relay Services part number 308624 15 0 Rev 00 A number of network management and performance management applications use the ifSpeed MIB attribute to calculate traffic utilization on virtual circuits and to generate alarms when traffic utilization exceeds certain thresholds Before Version 15 6 BayRS automatically set the ifSpeed MIB attribute to the line speed of the interface not to the speed of the frame relay virtual circuits on that interface
166. g parameter to enable or disable IP payload compression over a GRE tunnel This parameter is available only for the logical IP interface configured on GRE tunnels Parameter IP Payload Compression Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt Interfaces Default Disable Options Enable Disable Function Enables or disables IP payload compression and decompression on the logical IP interface configured on a GRE tunnel The compressed data is sent over the GRE tunnel Instructions Specify Enable to enable IP payload compression and decompression on the IP MIB Object ID interface of the GRE tunnel specify Disable to disable IP payload compression and decompression on the IP interface of the GRE tunnel 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 24 1 65 NAT Global Parameter The following parameter was used when upgrading from a pre 14 20 NAT configuration to a Version 14 20 or greater BayRS software version This parameter should be set to Enable Parameter Install Private Address Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt NAT gt Global Default Enable Options Enable Disable Function This parameter was added in BayRS Version 14 20 to address a compatibility issue concerning non DNS NAT translations when upgrading a pre 14 20 NAT configuration to a Version 14 20 or greater BayRS software version This parameter should be set to Enable Disabling this parameter can cause unpredictable results Instructions Accept the de
167. gnal is looped back for re transmission after it has passed through the device s framing function e Line Loopback The received signal at this interface does not go through the framing device minimum penetration but is looped back out Select the loopback configuration option 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 26 10 1 9 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 9 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Primary Clock Configuration Manager gt ATM1 gt Physical Layer Configuration gt DS3 or E3 Loop Internal Loop Specifies the clock signal source Select Internal if you want the router to generate the clock signal source Otherwise accept the default Loop if you want the clock signal source to be external to the router 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 26 10 1 11 ATM Service Record Parameter Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID You use the following parameter to specify a line speed value for a PVC service record or for a classical IP service record Optional Line Speed Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes 0 0 or any positive integer Specifies the line speed in bits per second for this service record This value is reported by the ifSpeed MIB variable which is used by SNMP based management applications to obtain a line speed for any VC configu
168. gns Specifying NLPIDs as Match Criteria To filter on a range of NLPIDs navigate to the match ip frame relay prompt for example box mct1 4 1 logical line lt MCT_line_no gt protocol priority ip outbound filter lt filter_name gt match ip ip match ip frame relay and enter the following command pri ip fr nlpid lt nipid_range gt nipid_range specifies any number of network layer protocol identifiers NLPIDs It can also specify ranges of NLPIDs Specifying the Action of Outbound Traffic Filters For outbound traffic filters you can specify different types of action e Filtering Actions e Prioritizing Actions e Dial Service Actions 314470 15 6 Rev 00 16 19 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Filtering Actions The filter action determines what happens to packets that match the filter criteria You can configure IP outbound traffic filters to perform the following actions e Accept The router processes any packet that matches the filter criteria and ranges e Drop The router does not route any packet that matches the filter criteria and ranges e Log For every packet that matches the filter criteria the router sends an entry to the system event log You can specify the log action in combination with other actions Note Specify the Log action to record abnormal events only otherwise the Events log will fill up with filtering messages leaving no room for critical log messages To s
169. gured Shaped Queue Number Point DSCP 5 7 INTQ1 CS7 INTQ2 CS6 Q1 CS5 EF Q2 AF4x CS4 Q3 AF3x CS3 Q4 AF2x CS2 Q5 AF1x CS1 DF CS0 6 8 INTQ1 CS7 INTQ2 CS6 Q1 CS5 EF Q2 AF4x CS4 Q3 AF3x CS3 Q4 AF2x CS2 Q5 AF1x CS1 Q6 DF CS0 Note INTQ1 and INTQ2 are internal queues EF CS5 CS4 CS3 and AF3x are DSCPs associated with traffic types that are not router generated This QoS enhancement deals only with the DSCP tag values listed in Table 6 2 The other tag values are included in the table as a reference for facilitating configuration recommendations To support this QoS enhancement BCC show command statistics output is expanded to provide additional information as described in the next section 314470 15 6 Rev 00 6 9 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice BCC show Command Enhancement The following information supersedes that provided in Appendix C Using BCC show Commands in Configuring Differentiated Services show dsqms queues stats The BCC show dsqms queues stats command displays a table of DSQMS queues or more specific information based on any filter argument entered with a subset of information from the show dsqms queues detail command This command displays statistics for the DSQMS configured queues and the reserved DSQMS queues two internal queues and the frame relay shaped queue It is the only command that provides any information about the DSQMS reser
170. he Configuration Manager window 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring IP ARP RARP RIP and OSPF Services RFC 3101 Forwarding Address Compatibility for OSPF NSSA Beginning with BayRS Version 15 5 0 0 you can configure the autonomous system external ASE forwarding address of the type 7 not so stubby area NSSA link state database LSDB to any valid IP address on the network The reason for this improvement is that in BayRS Version 15 5 0 0 the Open Shortest Path First OSPF NSSA is enhanced to comply with section 2 5 Calculating Type 7 AS External Routes and some parts of Appendix F Differences from RFC 1587 of RFC 3101 Full implementation of RFC 3101 is planned for a future release Using the enhanced functionality in Version 15 5 0 0 a network administrator now has the option to import summary route advertisements into the NSSAs If the option to import summary advertisements is not enabled then the NSSA autonomous system AS boundary router ASBR generates a default summary route for the NSSA that enables inter area routing from the NSSA to the other areas In addition to this new option an administrator now also can set the autonomous system external ASE forwarding address of the AS external routes that are generated in the NSSA In prior implementations of OSPF NSSA which were based on RFC 1587 Nortel routers selected as the ASE forwarding address the lowest IP address of the interfaces that were
171. he QoS mechanism at the frame relay level In earlier versions of BayRS only protocol prioritization operated at the frame relay level even if DSQMS was configured at the interface level Note For more information about frame relay traffic shaping using DSQMS see Frame Relay Traffic Shaping with DSQMS on page 9 5 The treatment of the following traffic is the same as in earlier versions of BayRS frame relay Local Management Interface LMI traffic and PPP Link Quality Report LQR packets and Link Control Protocol LCP echo requests 314470 15 6 Rev 00 6 13 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice BayRS tags frame relay LMI as interrupt traffic only if protocol prioritization is configured So the purpose of protocol prioritization configuration for LMI is only to tag packets in the frame relay code so they can be identified later in the driver code When a tagged LMI packet comes to the driver the following occurs e When DSQMS is not configured protocol prioritization operates at the driver level In this case protocol prioritization identifies the tag and puts the LMI traffic into the Interrupt Queue e When DSQMS is configured it takes precedence over protocol prioritization In this case DSQMS identifies the tag and puts the LMI traffic into Internal Queue 1 IntQ1 Using Site Manager to Configure DSQMS The following section supplements Chapter 2 Starting Differentiated Services an
172. he end to end fragmentation format is used in both the DTE to DTE configuration BayRS to BayRS and in the DTE to DCE configuration BayRS to Passport 7000 15000 Note FRF 12 interface fragmentation format UNI and NNI fragmentation and the FRF 11 Annex C fragmentation format are not supported Both sides of the circuit must be configured for FRF 12 fragmentation FRF 12 fragmentation is implemented within frame relay The associated interleaving is implemented at the interface level within DSQMS Interleaving uses only two classes of packets voice DSCP defined and non voice and no reordering of packets occurs within either class Enabling and disabling FRF 12 fragmentation causes the PVC to restart DSQMS traffic shaping must be configured on the PVCs Protocol prioritization is not supported at the PVC or interface level for FRF 12 DSQMS and FRF 12 interleaving must be configured on the interface associated with an FRF 12 PVC 314470 15 6 Rev 00 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice e Ifany PVC ona slow speed interface 1 Mb s or less is configured for FRF 12 all other PVCs on that interface must also be configured for FRE 12 For higher speed interfaces all PVCs to the same destination over that interface must also be configured for FRF 12 FRF 9 FRF 12 and Traffic Shaping FRE 9 data compression FRF 12 fragmentation and interleaving and PVC traffic shaping can all work together When c
173. iated Services as well as Chapter 6 Configuring Differentiated Services in this Document Change Notice Configuration Prerequisites To use DSQMS as the QoS mechanism for frame relay PVCs you must e Configure DSQMS on the interface e Enable traffic shaping on one or more PVCs on the frame relay interface DSQMS applies only to shaped PVCs traffic from non shaped PVCs is processed by the DSQMS instance running on the interface 9 6 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Frame Relay Services Implementation Note Configuring the Packet Limit for Queues To use DSQMS as the QoS mechanism for frame relay PVCs you may need to adjust the value of the Packet Limit parameter for a description of the Site Manager parameter see page A 22 The Packet Limit parameter specifies the maximum number of packets that this queue can hold When the queue is used by shaped frame relay PVCs the default value of 0 sets the packet limit to 20 In some cases this default value increases clipping of voice packets If you discover that voice packets are being lost Nortel recommends that you reset the Packet Limit parameter on the queue that services EF packets to a higher value for example 128 or 256 However be aware that this higher value may increase latency You may need to fine tune the value of the Packet Loss parameter to find one that works best for your configuration Note After you reset this parameter you must save the config
174. ifferentiated Services Verso TE AO ccs ewe an aie ieee Saeed ue 6 1 Modifying RED Parameters s EEEE E mains E E 6 1 Version 15 2 0 0 sarius bondia E haisi EE T eiiis iaieineea pisaia o Poon PAIE sre aiena a EO EEEa 6 2 Verson 1S 0 auai inieneedeeeshteaben aes E POE 6 2 MAIS TAA NOOS snnsanssreniat ben 6 2 beets ith a Genrer E irene rece ere een eee E ert renee tre rem errr E reece tere 6 3 Implementation Notes EEE rae a ere piers EET ERT E o E vi 314470 15 6 Rev 00 DS LoS ce ce cease ce eee esa EEE E E 6 5 DSCP Tagging for Router Generated Packets ines PE Tere 6 5 DSCP Tagging of ICMP SNMP and Telnet Packets pers T aiei E DSCP Tagging of IPsec Packets ccccccsiscescisinanecisaaraceecnatianasneinanedatiarsaneecians 6 7 Mapping of Router Generated Packets to DSQMS Queues iiai 6 8 BCC show Command Enhancement ssiririiirisirasiseiis 6 10 Show SERINE ists ne cecssst aces ns cna dees scntalbinccrs sae beter ducati oaenecsuady 6 10 Interoperability of Protocol Prioritization Priority Queuing and DSQMS 6 11 beet ee 8 O02 pen erie peers ener Pe peor epee revere cere ren yer eres rere tree E t er reer rr toe tr ere re 6 12 Mapping of Router Generated Protocol Packets to DSCPS ccscccccestteeeeeeenees 6 12 Interoperability of Protocol Prioritization and DSQMS EPER diresis pasias 6 13 Using Site Manager to Configure DSQMS cces
175. in each of the DLSw priority queues for a peer with an IP address of 192 168 1 1 navigate to the peer s dlsw peer queue configuration prompt and enter dlsw peer queue configuration 192 168 1 1 max queue buffers 200 dlsw peer queue configuration 192 168 1 1 bandwidth allocation To allocate the bandwidth for each of the peer s 10 DLSw priority queues first navigate to the peer s dlsw peer queue configuration prompt for example box disw disw peer queue configuration lt peer P address gt and enter 7 6 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring DLSw Services bandwidth allocation This action displays the bandwidth allocation lt peer IP address gt prompt for the peer At the bandwidth allocation lt peer IP address gt prompt for the peer enter disw queue lt value gt value is the allocated bandwidth for each of the 10 DLSw priority queues 0 9 The default value is 60 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O A valid value is any combination of 10 entries that add up to 100 Each entry represents the allocated bandwidth percentage for one of the 10 queues 0 through 9 You must enter a value for each of the 10 queues The sum of the specified bandwidth percentages must equal 100 For example to allocate 10 percent of the bandwidth to each of the 10 queues navigate to the peer s bandwidth allocation prompt and enter bandwidth allocation 192 168 1 1 dlsw queue 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 bandwidth allocation 192 1
176. ination address as a filter criteria navigate to the peer filter s match prompt for example box dlsw dlsw priority outbound filter lt filter_name gt lt peer_address gt match and enter pri dlsw mac dest addr lt address_range gt lt address_range gt is the range of MAC destination addresses for the filter in hexadecimal notation Valid values are in the range of 0 FFFFFFFFFFFF inclusive For a range with only one value enter only one MAC destination address The BCC automatically uses that value for both the minimum and maximum values in the address range 7 10 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring DLSw Services For example to specify a range of MAC destination addresses from Oaaa to Oaab as a match criteria for a filter named dsap_Oland02_q3 for a peer with an IP address of 192 168 1 1 navigate to the filter s match prompt box disw disw priority outbound filter dsap_01and02_q3 192 168 1 1 match and enter match dsap_0land02_q3 192 168 1 1 pri dlsw mac dest addr 0aaa Oaab match dsap_0land02_q3 192 168 1 1 Specifying MAC source addresses To specify a MAC source address as a filter criteria navigate to the peer filter s match prompt for example box dlsw dlsw priority outbound filter lt filter_name gt lt peer_address gt match and enter pri dlsw mac src addr lt address_range gt lt address_range gt is the range of MAC destination addresses for the filter in hexadecimal notatio
177. ing FRE9 data compression FRF 12 fragmentation and interleaving and PVC traffic shaping can all work together When configured together these features are executed on an outgoing PVC in this order 1 Traffic shaping with DSQMS or protocol prioritization takes place if FRF 12 is configured you must use traffic shaping with DSQMS 2 FRE9 compresses traffic from the shaped PVCs 3 FRF 12 fragments the compressed packets On an incoming PVC reassembly of fragmented packets is done before decompression Note Testing indicates that configuring frame relay traffic shaping with DSQMS FRF 9 and FRF 12 on the same PVC is very CPU intensive and performance degradation is expected It is recommended that either FRE 9 or FRF 12 be used whichever is applicable to the network need 314470 15 6 Rev 00 9 11 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Configuring FRF 9 Compression You can use the BCC or Site Manager to configure FRF 9 compression on frame relay PVCs and SVCs By default FRF 9 compression is disabled Using the BCC To enable FRF 9 compression on a frame relay PVC or SVC navigate to the PVC or SVC prompt for example box serial 3 1 frame relay service paris pvc 3 1 33 or box serial 3 2 frame relay service newyork svc options toronto and enter frf9 control enabled disabled Note WCP compression and FRE 9 compression cannot be enabled at the same time Because WCP compression is e
178. ion and serial number 314470 15 6 Rev 00 24 3 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Configuring the BCC Inactivity Timer This section is an addition to Appendix A Multilevel Access With Version 15 6 you can configure an inactivity timeout to end BCC sessions when no traffic is passed from the station that opened the BCC session This timeout ensures that when the BCC session is closed the memory used by the old session is released To set a timeout for BCC sessions when there is no activity navigate to the bec config prompt for example box access bcc config and enter inactivity time lt integer gt integer is the number of minutes that the BCC can remain idle before the session times out Enter a value from 1 through 35791394 the default value For example the following commands set the BCC inactivity timer to 20 minutes box access access bec config bec config inactivity time 20 bec config 24 4 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Appendix A Site Manager Parameters This appendix describes the following Site Manager parameters Topic Page Adjacent Host Parameter A 3 ATM Line Parameters A 3 ATM Port Parameters A 7 ATM Service Record Parameter A 10 Automated Security Association IKE Parameters A 11 BGP 3 Specific Announce Policy Parameter A 12 BGP 4 Specific Announce Policy Parameter A 13 DSQMS RED Paramete
179. ion Considerations sareni na aaa 9 10 FRF 9 FRF 12 and Traffic Shaping shies poetic sch Ua tts E A ss 9 11 Configuring FAFO COmMpreSsSiON ic cecsspsacterreniicesinesionscnantsebibad sian 9 12 Configuring FRF 12 Fragmentation and Interleaving cccceeceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneeeee 9 15 Overview of FRF 12 Fragmentation and Interleaving TO 9 15 Configuring FRF 12 Fragmentation and Interleaving cceccceeeeeeeeteeeeeees 9 19 Chapter 10 Configuring GRE NAT RIPSO and BFE Services MSN SIOM TERA E A E EA PA S E EN A AA A 10 1 Configuring GRE Keepalive Functionality cccccccceecseeteseeeteneeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeetes 10 1 Enabling and Disabling GRE Keepalive Messages for Remote Tunnel End Point 10 2 Setting the Timeout Interval for GRE Keepalive Messages csceeeeeeeees 10 3 Setting the Keepalive Retries Parameter for GRE Keepalive Messages 10 5 Chapter 11 Configuring IP ARP RARP RIP and OSPF Services E s E E EEA E E A A E ery errr E ET T 11 1 RFC 826 SUDPOM dsiriscizorasriasss Er ART E as ER E 11 1 NOT Rope 9 900 eee emery cer eer AT 11 2 Defining BGP Peers for BGP OSPF and RIP Announce Policies pci 11 2 Importing RIP Updates pradesa PEEP EEE peainags ee ee edisi brakes 11 2 WERE E AE E E E A EE N cud aeGenale pave 11 4 varsom Ta aO o E EE 11 5 Enabling and Disabling Unique Identifiers for ICMP Echo Requests 00 1
180. ircuit group when you use it to configure a RADIUS client 314470 15 6 Rev 00 15 1 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice To enable RADIUS on a router slot and configure the RADIUS client Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The RADIUS Client Parameters window select Protocols gt Global Protocols gt opens The window lists the slots that RADIUS gt Create RADIUS already have RADIUS configured on them 2 Click on Add For multislot routers the RADIUS Slot Selection window opens For single slot routers the RADIUS Client Parameters window opens Go to step 4 3 Enter the slot number on which you want The RADIUS Client Parameters window to configure RADIUS and click on OK opens 4 Set the following parameters e Authentication e Accounting e Client IP Address e Debug Message Level Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 62 5 Click on OK You return to the RADIUS Client Parameters window Modifying Router Access Using the BCC or Site Manager With RADIUS you can modify access to the router using the user manager lock and the login accounting feature User Manager Lock With earlier versions of BayRS you enabled the user manager lock using the Technician Interface only You can now enable it using the BCC or Site Manager The lock is disabled by default allowing access by all users with the
181. irtual circuit Qualified Logical Link Control quality of service Remote Access Dial In User Services Reverse Address Resolution Protocol random early detection Routing Information Protocol rendezvous point sparse mode Simple Network Management Protocol source specific multicast source route bridge switched virtual circuit type of service virtual circuit Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol 314470 15 6 Rev 00 xix BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Hard Copy Technical Manuals You can print selected technical manuals and release notes free directly from the Internet Go to the www nortel com support URL Find the product for which you need documentation Then locate the specific category and model or version for your hardware or software product Use Adobe Acrobat Reader to open the manuals and release notes search for the sections you need and print them on most standard printers Go to Adobe Systems at the www adobe com URL to download a free copy of the Adobe Acrobat Reader How to Get Help If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel Networks product from a distributor or authorized reseller contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller for assistance If you purchased a Nortel Networks service program contact Nortel Networks Technical Support To obtain contact information online go to the www nortel com cgi bin comments comments cgi URL then click on Technical
182. is in the bn fre4 directory From the Hi fn CD copy the file 15xxx bn fre4 hifn ppc to the BN platform directory under the Image Builder directory 5 8 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Data Compression Services 13 14 15 16 17 When you copy the hifn ppc file to an HP platform it is automatically renamed HIFN PPC 1 You must rename the file to hifn ppc by executing the following command mv HIFN PPC 1 hifn ppe Note that you must use quotation marks before and after HIFN PPC 1 Start the Image Builder again and open the BN router image from which you removed the hifn exe file Click on Details under the Available Components box select hifn ppc and hifn exe if necessary and click on Add Save the modified image that includes Hi fn LZS compression to a new directory and exit the Image Builder Use the Router Files Manager to transfer the new image to the BN router Perform a named boot with the new image following the directions in Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager You can now use Hi fn LZS compression software on the BN router with a FRE 4 PPC module 314470 15 6 Rev 00 5 9 Chapter 6 Configuring Differentiated Services Version 15 1 0 0 The following section describes a change to Configuring Differentiated Services Modifying RED Parameters The following change is required to Table 6 1 in the Modifying RED Parameters section of Configuring Differe
183. ity lt state gt state is one of the following disable default enable For example the following command enables RFC 3101 compatibility on the router ospf rfce3101 fwd addr compatibility enable ospf Using Site Manager To enable or disable RFC 3101 compatibility on the router complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Protocols menu opens choose Protocols 2 Choose IP The IP menu opens 3 Choose OSPF MOSPF The OSPF MOSPF menu opens 4 Choose Global The Edit OSPF Global Parameters window opens 5 Set the Rfc 3101 Compatibility Enable The value you chose appears in the Rfc parameter Click on Help or see the 3101 Compatibility Enable field parameter description on page A 51 6 Click on OK You return to the Configuration Manager window 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring IP ARP RARP RIP and OSPF Services Configuring the Not So Stubby Area NSSA Forwarding Address Once you enable RFC 3101 compatibility on the router you must specify the IP address to be used as the new ASE forwarding address for the NSSA You can specify this address using the BCC or Site Manager Note To configure this parameter you first must enable the origination of a type 7 default route by the AS boundary router Using the BCC Before you can configure a not so stubby area NSSA forwarding
184. k on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 30 Click on Done Click on Done You return to the Frame Relay Service List window You return to the Frame Relay Circuit Definition window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 9 26 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Frame Relay Services Configuring FRF 12 Interleaving on the Frame Relay Interface To configure FRF 12 interleaving on the frame relay interface complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens Choose IP The IP menu opens 3 Choose DSQMS 4 Choose Interface The DSQMS menu opens The Edit DSQMS Parameters window opens Select the interface that you want to configure FRF 12 interleaving on Set the following parameters e FRF 12 Interleaving Enable e FRF 12 NonPriority High Water Mark e FRF 12 Priority Fragment Weight Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 18 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 314470 15 6 Rev 00 9 27 Chapter 10 Configuring GRE NAT RIPSO and BFE Services Version 15 5 0 0 The following information supplements Chapter 1 Configuring GRE Tunnels in Configuring GRE NAT RIPSO and BFE Services Configuring GRE
185. k on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens BN or the ATM Configuration want to modify window opens Passport 5430 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens 4 Click on the PVC or classical IP service record that you want to configure a line speed for 5 Set the Optional Line Speed parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 10 continued 314470 15 6 Rev 00 3 13 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 6 Click on Done System responds You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 7 Click on Done 8 Click on Done You return to the ATM Configuration or the Select Connection Type window You return to the Configuration Manager window 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Chapter 4 Configuring Bridging Services Version 15 2 0 0 The following section corrects an error in Configuring Bridging Services Interfaces Supported The section Interfaces Supported under Implementation Notes in Configuring Bridging Services incorrectly states that the translation bridge can operate on all source routing SR interfaces supported by Nortel Networks routers except IP The translation bridge can operate on all SR interfaces supported by Nortel Networks routers except for interfaces configured for SRB
186. l 2 Set the User Manager Lock parameter to Enable For more information click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 62 3 Click on OK You return to the Configuration Manager window 314470 15 6 Rev 00 15 3 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Login Accounting BayRS RADIUS accounting is now supported for console and Telnet router logins The following sections new to Configuring RADIUS describe the functionality that was added to support this feature You determine whether a console or Telnet login session should allow RADIUS accounting messages to be sent to the RADIUS server by enabling or disabling RADIUS accounting access to the server Using the BCC To allow RADIUS accounting messages to be sent to the RADIUS server navigate to the access prompt for example box access and enter user access radius account enable enable To prevent RADIUS accounting messages from being sent to the RADIUS server navigate to the access prompt for example box access and enter user access radius account enable disable Note If you enable login accounting and the RADIUS server becomes unavailable the value for the user access radius account enable parameter is automatically set to serverwait When the RADIUS server becomes available again the value reverts to enabled 15 4 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring RADIUS Using Site Manager To allow
187. l identifiers It can also specify ranges of protocol identifiers Specifying Match Criteria for IP to Frame Relay Outbound Traffic Filters To prepare to specify the filtering criteria for IP to frame relay outbound filters navigate to the match ip ip prompt for example box mcet1 4 1 logical line lt MCT_line_no gt protocol priority ip outbound filter lt filter_name gt match ip ip and enter match ip frame relay 16 18 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization Specifying DLCIs as Match Criteria To filter on a range of DLCIs navigate to the match ip frame relay prompt for example box mct1 4 1 logical line lt MCT_line_no gt protocol priority ip outbound filter lt filter_name gt match ip ip match ip frame relay and enter the following command pri ip fr dici2byte dici3byte dicidbyte lt byte_range gt byte_range specifies the PVC identification number used by the frame relay network to direct data or ranges of numbers on which you want to filter outbound traffic For the 2 byte DLCI address field the valid values are 16 to 1007 Enter the decimal number that the frame relay provider assigns For the 3 byte DLCI address field the valid values are 1024 to 64511 Enter the decimal number that the frame relay provider assigns For the 4 byte DLCI address field the valid values are 131072 to 4194303 Enter the decimal number that the frame relay provider assi
188. l priority prompt for example box ethernet 2 1 protocol priority and enter normal queue percentage bandwidth lt percent percent is a value between 0 to 100 inclusive The default is 20 percent The high queue normal queue and low queue percentage bandwidth values must total 100 For example the following command changes the normal queue percentage bandwidth to 30 percent protocol priority ethernet 2 1 normal queue percentage bandwidth 30 protocol priority ethernet 2 1 314470 15 6 Rev 00 16 7 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Selecting the Low Queue Percentage Bandwidth If you selected the bandwidth allocation dequeuing algorithm to specify the percentage of the synchronous line s bandwidth allocated to low priority traffic navigate to the protocol priority prompt for example box ethernet 2 1 protocol priority and enter low queue percentage bandwidth lt percent percent is a value between 0 to 100 inclusive The default is 10 percent The high queue normal queue and low queue percentage bandwidth values must total 100 For example the following command changes the low queue percentage bandwidth to 20 percent protocol priority ethernet 2 1 low queue percentage bandwidth 20 protocol priority ethernet 2 1 Controlling the Dequeuing of Packets To control the dequeuing of packets from the queues to the driver navigate to the protocol priority prompt for example box ethernet 2 1
189. land02_q3 192 168 1 1 action log on actions dsap_0land02_q3 192 168 1 1 7 14 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Chapter 8 Configuring Ethernet FDDI and Token Ring Services Version 15 4 0 0 The following section is new to Chapter 2 of Configuring Ethernet FDDI and Token Ring Services The sections Router Processing of Tagged Frames Implementation Considerations Adding a Tagged Circuit to an Unconfigured 1OBASE T or 100BASE T Interface and Adding a Tagged Circuit to an Existing 1OBASE T or 1OOBASE T Interface contain amendments to Chapter 5 of Configuring Ethernet FDDI and Token Ring Services Specifying the DSQMS Line Speed You specify the DSQMS line speed using the dsqms line speed parameter You access this parameter by navigating to the Ethernet prompt for example box ethernet 2 1 and entering the following command dsqms line speed lt value gt value specifies the line speed in bits per second for the DSQMS client The default is 1250000 1 25 Mb s In network configurations where the Ethernet interface is connected to an external access device such as DSL or a cable modem the dsqms line speed parameter can be used in conjunction with the dequeue at line rate parameter enabled on the egress interface and traffic policing on the ingress interface for traffic management 314470 15 6 Rev 00 8 1 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice For example to change the line speed to 1
190. lay The IP menu opens The IGMP menu opens 13 Choose Global The IGMP Global Configuration window opens 14 Set the Translation Enable parameter to Enable Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 39 15 Click on OK You return to the Configuration Manager window 13 16 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring IP Multicasting and Multimedia Services Configuring Static RP Routers for PIM SM The revised draft of the PIM SM specification stipulates that RFC compliant implementations of PIM SM must support a statically configured RP BayRS now supports static RP routers along with the dynamically configured RP routers discovered using the bootstrap method that were supported before Version 15 6 Static RPs and dynamically configured RPs can coexist in the same PIM domain You can designate one or more PIM routers as static RPs by mapping the IP address of the router interface to a multicast group address and prefix and assigning a priority level The interface on which you configure static RP must have PIM SM already configured on it A PIM router can serve as a static RP for more than one group and a group can have more than one static RP To configure a router as a static RP complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Protocols menu opens choose Protocols 2 Choose IP
191. llowing information Tunnel Name Local Network Address Local State Remote Endpoint Name Remote Endpoint Address Keepalive Enabled Name assigned to the GRE tunnel Address of the host interface on the local end of the GRE tunnel connection State of the local host interface enabled or disabled Name assigned to the host interface on the remote end of the GRE tunnel connection Name of the host on the remote end of the GRE tunnel connection If enabled indicates that keepalives will be sent to the remote endpoint and keepalives received from that endpoint will be acted upon enabled or disabled 314470 15 6 Rev 00 20 3 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice State Timer Retries show gre physical tunnels State of the GRE connection up or down The state of a connection is up unless it is declared down as a result of keepalive failure or the GRE connection is disabled Interval of time in seconds between transmission of successive keepalive packets to the remote endpoint Amount of time to wait before declaring a GRE connection down Retries is expressed as a multiple of the configured Timer value where Retries is the number by which the Timer value is multiplied The show gre physical tunnels command displays information about the router interfaces at either end of the physical GRE tunnel This command allows for the following command filters and
192. ls gt IP gt DSQMS gt RED 1 O through 100 Specifies the first order constant used when calculating the drop probability based on the average queue fraction the queue size and the value of the Min Threshold parameter Accept the default value 1 or reset the first order constant to a value from 0 through 100 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 16 4 1 5 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Second Order Const Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt DSQMS gt RED 10 0 through 1000 Specifies the second order constant used when calculating the drop probability based on the average queue fraction the queue size and the value of the Min Threshold parameter Accept the default value 10 or reset the second order constant to a value from 1 through 1000 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 16 4 1 4 Min Threshold Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt DSQMS gt RED 20 O through 100 Indicates the queue size as a percentage below which no packets are dropped by RED When the minimum threshold value is reached the router begins dropping packets in direct relation to any increase in average queue size until the average queue size falls below the minimum thre
193. lt values that should work in most networks These parameters set timers and counters as follows Robustness Variable Specifies a tuning value for the expected packet loss on the network By default this parameter is set to 2 You can configure a value from 1 through 8 Startup Query Interval Specifies the number of seconds that can elapse between general queries sent by the router on this interface By default this parameter is set to 31 seconds If you reset the Interface Query Rate parameter you should reset the Startup Query Interval parameter to 1 4 the value of the Interface Query Rate parameter Startup Query Count Specifies the number of general queries sent by the router on this interface By default this parameter is set to 2 If you reset the Robustness Variable parameter you should reset the Startup Query Count parameter to the same value as the Robustness Variable parameter Last Member Query Interval Specifies in tenths of one second the maximum response time inserted into group specific queries and group and source specific queries sent in response to a leave group message By default this parameter is set to 10 tenths of one second You can configure a value from 1 through 31 744 A reduced value results in reduced time to detect the loss of the last member of a group or source Last Member Query Count Specifies the number of group specific queries sent by the router on this interface before the router assumes th
194. lue is 16000 For example to specify 18000 as the maximum number of packets in each default queue enter dlsw protocol prioritization max queue size unconfig peers 18000 dlsw protocol prioritization default bandwidth To specify the number of default queues to be used and allocate the bandwidth for each navigate to the dlsw protocol prioritization prompt for example box disw disw protocol prioritization and enter default bandwidth lt value gt value is the allocated bandwidth for each of the 10 default priority queues 0 9 The default value is 60 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Thus the default setting utilizes only two priority queues by allocating 60 for queue 0 40 for queue 1 and 0 for each of the remaining 8 queues A valid value is any combination of 10 entries that add up to 100 Each entry represents the allocated bandwidth percentage for one of the 10 queues 0 through 9 You must enter a value for each of the 10 queues The sum of the specified bandwidth percentages must equal 100 314470 15 6 Rev 00 7 3 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice For example to allocate 10 percent of the bandwidth to each of the 10 queues navigate to the dlsw protocol prioritization prompt for example box disw disw protocol prioritization and enter dlsw protocol prioritization default bandwidth 10 10 10 1010101010 10 10 dlsw protocol prioritization For example to allocate 40 percent of the band
195. management applications assigning trap ports 2 1 No Calling Address parameter X 25 network service record A 66 Nonlocal Reports parameter IGMP global A 37 Nortel Technical Support site 1 1 NSSA Forward Address OSPF area A 51 NSSA OSPF configuring forwarding address for 11 9 O online library CD 1 1 OSPF Announce Policy parameter description A 52 OSPF Area parameter description A 51 OSPF Global parameter description A 51 OSPF enabling RFC 3101 forwarding address compatibility for NSSA 11 7 Index 4 Outgoing Interface Deletion Delay parameter PIM interface A 57 P Passport 2430 Hi fn LZS compression for 5 1 Passport 5430 Hi fn LZS compression for 5 1 payload compression command 5 5 PC Site Manager requirements 21 3 PIM Global parameter descriptions A 53 PIM Interface parameter descriptions A 57 PIM Static RP parameter descriptions A 58 PIM SM bootstrap border router 13 1 static RP routers 13 17 translation table 13 15 PIM SSM BayRS implementation 13 3 configuration prerequisites 13 5 customizing 13 9 editing existing PIM SM configuration 13 7 enabling ECMP for 13 10 enabling or disabling globally 13 9 overview 13 2 reference documents 13 4 starting on router 13 5 translation table 13 15 PPP configuring LQM and LQR for HSSI modules 14 9 enabling and disabling multiclass extension to multilink 14 3 enabling and disabling multilink multiclass on dial up lines 1
196. mpt to configure the router will cause the router to fault To use the output of the show config command to configure a router save the output in a text file and then use the BCC source command to import the file into device memory For complete information about using the source command to configure the router see Chapter 3 of Using the Bay Command Console BCC 314470 15 6 Rev 00 24 1 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice show hardware Command This section is an addition to Appendix B System show Commands It includes the new processors option for the show hardware command show hardware backplane config_file The show hardware commands display information about router hardware This command supports the following subcommand options backplane memory config file processors daughter_card proms image slots Displays information about the state of the backplane hardware The table includes the backplane type revision and serial number The revision and serial numbers are in decimal format Displays the configuration file used to boot the router or reset a slot The table shows the volume and file name used as the source of the configuration The table also shows the date and load time daughter_card Displays information about the hardware that is performing compression services The table shows the slot where the compression hardware resides as well as the card type revisi
197. n Valid values are in the range of 0 FFFFFFFFFFFF inclusive For a range with only one value enter only one MAC source address The BCC automatically uses that value for both the minimum and maximum values in the address range For example to specify a range of MAC source addresses from 0000a2000001 to 0000a2000003 as a match criteria for a filter named dsap_Oland02_q3 for a peer with an IP address of 192 168 1 1 navigate to the filter s match prompt box disw disw priority outbound filter dsap_01and02_q3 192 168 1 1 match and enter match dsap_01land02_q3 192 168 1 1 pri dlsw mac src addr 0000a2000001 0000a2000003 match dsap_0land02_q3 192 168 1 1 Specifying SAP destination addresses To specify a SAP destination address as a filter criteria navigate to the peer filter s match prompt for example box dlsw dlsw priority outbound filter lt filter_name gt lt peer_address gt match and enter pri dlsw dsap lt address_range gt 314470 15 6 Rev 00 7 11 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice lt address_range gt is the range of SAP destination addresses for the filter Valid values are in the range of 0 65535 inclusive For a range with only one value enter only one SAP destination address The BCC automatically uses that value for both the minimum and maximum values in the address range For example to specify a range of SAP destination addresses from 1 to 2 as a match criteria for a filte
198. n your workstation Click on Details below the Current Components box Select the hifn exe file under Baseline Router Software and click on Remove This hifn exe file is only a placeholder Note that the Component Information box shows its compressed size as less than 2 KB Choose File gt Save to save the modified image Exit the Image Builder Open the Image Builder directory for the BN router On a PC the default directory is wf builder dir rel lt release_number gt bn for example wf builder dir rel15600 bn On a UNIX platform the default directory is builder rel lt release_number gt bn for example builder rel15600 bn Insert the Hi fn LZS software CD into the CD ROM drive Open the following folders on the CD in order 15 6 0 0 or greater bn The bn directory contains the hifn exe file and a directory called fre4 If the BN router has FRE 2 or FRE 2 060 modules on which you want to run Hi fn LZS compression copy the file 15xxx bn hifn exe from the Hi fn CD to the BN platform directory under the Image Builder directory When you copy the hifn exe file to an HP platform it is automatically renamed HIFN EXE 1 You must rename the file to hifn exe by executing the following command mv HIFN EXE 1 hifn exe Note that you must use quotation marks before and after HIFN EXE 1 Open the bn fre4 directory on the Hi fn CD To run IP payload compression on FRE 4 PPC modules you must install the hifn ppc file that
199. nabled by default you will probably need to disable WCP before you can enable FRE 9 compression To set a minimum size for frames to be compressed by FRF 9 on the PVC or SVC enter frf9 min compress size lt integer gt lt integer gt is the minimum byte count for frames to be compressed by FRF 9 The default value is O that is all frames going out this PVC or SVC are compressed For example the following commands disable WCP compression enable FRF 9 compression and set the minimum frame size for FRF 9 compression to 500 bytes on PVC 3 1 33 serial 3 1 frame relay frame relay 3 1 service paris service paris pvce 3 1 33 pvc 3 1 33 wep control disabled pvc 3 1 33 frf9 control enabled pvc 3 1 33 frf9 min compress size 500 pvc 3 1 33 The following commands disable WCP compression and enable FRF 9 compression on SVC toronto serial 3 2 frame relay frame relay 3 2 service newyork svc options toronto svc options toronto wep control disabled svc options toronto frf9 control enabled 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Frame Relay Services Using Site Manager To configure FRF 9 compression on a frame relay PVC complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 2 Choose Frame Relay The Frame Relay menu opens 3 Choose Services The Frame Relay Service List windo
200. nagement application for receiving trap messages To avoid any problems when running another network management application Nortel Networks recommends that you configure Site Manager to map to an alternative UDP port This allows you to send trap messages to Site Manager directly 314470 15 6 Rev 00 2 1 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice To reconfigure the trap port 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols gt IP gt SNMP gt Communities The SNMP Community List window opens Choose Community gt Managers The SNMP Manager List window opens Choose Manager gt Edit Manager The Trap Port and Trap Types window opens Type a new port number for the Trap Port parameter then click on OK You can enter any port number on your Site Manager workstation as long as another application is not using that port You return to the Configuration Manager window Choose File gt Save to save this configuration file See Chapter 3 in Configuring and Managing Routers Using Site Manager for instructions on saving configuration files Choose File gt Exit You return to the main Site Manager window Restart Site Manager according to the instructions in Chapter 1 of Configuring and Managing Routers Using Site Manager To make sure that Site Manager is able to listen to the port that you configured in step 4 restart Site Manager using the wfsm e command or the Trap Monitor using the wftraps e
201. nd for each source and destination network that you want to filter on pri ip sr src pri ip sr dest addr lt address_range gt lt address_range gt specifies a range of addresses for source and destination networks 314470 15 6 Rev 00 16 17 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Example match ip source routing ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 pri ip sr src addr 10 1 0 0 10 1 255 255 pri ip sr src addr ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 10 1 0 0 10 1 255 255 back match ip source routing ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 pri ip sr dest addr 10 2 0 0 10 2 255 255 pri ip sr dest addr ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 10 2 0 0 10 2 255 255 back match ip ip ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 Specifying Match Criteria for IP to PPP Outbound Traffic Filters To prepare to specify the filtering criteria navigate to the match ip ip prompt for example box mct1 4 1 logical line lt MCT_line_no gt protocol priority ip outbound filter lt fi ter_name gt match ip ip and enter match ip ppp Specifying Protocol IDs as Match Criteria To filter on a range of protocol IDs navigate to the match ip ppp prompt for example box mct1 4 1 logical line lt MMCT_line_no gt protocol priority ip outbound filter lt filter_name gt match ip ip match ip ppp and enter the following command pri ip ppp protocol id lt ist_of_protocols gt list_of_protocols can include any number of protoco
202. nfiguration Manager gt Protocols gt Frame Relay gt Services 0 0 or any positive integer Specifies the line speed in bits per second for this service record This value is reported by the ifSpeed MIB variable which is used by SNMP based management applications to obtain a line speed for any VC configured on this service record and to generate alarms as required If you accept the default value 0 the line speed of the interface as a whole is displayed in network management applications that use the ifSpeed MIB variable to monitor traffic statistics Note The value that you set with this parameter is for reporting purposes only it has no effect on the actual performance of the virtual circuit Accept the default value 0 to allow the ifSpeed MIB variable to report the interface speed Otherwise enter an integer value up to the maximum line speed of this interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 5 1 38 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 31 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Frame Relay SVC Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID You use the following parameters to configure FRF 9 compression on a frame relay SVC FRE 9 Enable Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt Frame Relay gt Services gt SVCs Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables FRF 9 compression on this SVC You mu
203. ng address To use this parameter you must first set the NSSA Originate Def Route parameter to Enable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 3 2 1 16 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 51 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice OSPF RIP Announce Policy Parameter You use the following parameter to specify one or more BGP peers for an OSPF or RIP announce policy Parameter From BGP Peer Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt Policy Filters gt RIP gt Announce Policies Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt Policy Filters gt OSPF gt Announce Policies Default An empty list Options A list of IP addresses Function Specifies the BGP router ID of the peer To verify the router ID of the BGP peer on the peer router check the configured value for the Site Manager BGP Global parameter BGP Identifier or the BCC BGP parameter router id This policy applies to BGP advertisements authored by a router on this list and applies only to BGP sourced routes when BGP is included as a route source Instructions Click in the From BGP Peer field and then click on the List button Specify one or more IP addresses Use the default empty list to indicate that this policy applies to BGP advertisements from any router MIB Object ID RIP 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 6 2 1 19 MIB Object ID OSPF 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 6 4 1 19 A 52 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters PIM Global Parameters Parameter Path
204. nnection is up unless it is declared down as a result of keepalive failure or the GRE connection is disabled Interval of time in seconds between transmission of successive keepalive packets to the remote endpoint Amount of time to wait before declaring a GRE connection down Retries is expressed as a multiple of the configured Timer value where Retries is the number by which the Timer value is multiplied 314470 15 6 Rev 00 20 5 Version 15 2 0 0 Chapter 21 Upgrading Routers to BayRS Version 15 x The following section describes changes to Upgrading Routers to BayRS Version 15 x Why You Upgrade Boot and Diagnostic PROMs Table A 1 in Why You Upgrade Boot and Diagnostic PROMs of Upgrading Routers to BayRS Version 15 x has been modified to include the latest boot and diagnostic PROM file names and associated revision numbers for router platforms running BayRS Version 15 x Diagnos Diagnostic tic PROM Reason for Boot PROM Router PROM Revision Upgrading Boot PROM Revision Platform File Name Number PROM File Name Number AN ANH andiag exe 7 36 Strata flash fea anboot exe 9 00d ture support ARN arndiag exe 2 24 Strata flash fea arnboot exe 1 27 ture support arndiag rom 2 24 Not applicable arnboot rom 1 27 e7srom rom 2 16 E7S feature sup isdb rom 1 06 port arn_pdbrom rom 1 22 Not applicable 314470 15 6 Rev 00 BayRS Version 15 6
205. nslation table entries in the IGMP Translation Table window 2 Enable PIM SM PIM SSM translation by setting the Translation Enable parameter on the IGMP Global Configuration window Note Create the translation table before you globally enable translation Making changes to the table after you enable translation globally resets IGMP 314470 15 6 Rev 00 13 15 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice To create a PIM SM IGMP Version 2 PIM SSM IGMP Version 3 translation table and to enable or disable translation complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols 2 Choose IP The Protocols menu opens The IP menu opens 3 Choose IGMP IGMP Relay The IGMP menu opens 4 Choose Translation Table The IP IGMP Translation Table window opens 5 Click on Add The IGMP Translation Table window opens 6 Set the Group Address parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 45 7 Set the Translation Source List parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 46 8 Click on OK You return to the IP IGMP Translation Table window 9 Click on OK You return to the Configuration Manager window 10 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 11 Choose IP 12 Choose IGMP IGMP Re
206. nt categories of network traffic based on the Nortel Networks service class NNSC Table 6 1 lists the correlation of traffic categories Nortel Networks service classes and DSCPs Table 6 1 Correlation of Traffic Categories Nortel Networks Service Codes and DiffServ Code Points Traffic Category NNSC DSCP Critical Control Critical CS7 Network Control Network CS6 Interactive Premium EF CS5 Platinum AF4x CS4 Responsive Gold AF3x CS3 Silver AF2x CS2 Timely Bronze AF 1x CS1 Standard DF CS0 314470 15 6 Rev 00 6 5 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Beginning with Version 15 5 0 0 protocol packets originating from the BayRS router are marked with the DSCP tags markings shown in Table 6 2 These markings are not configurable they are hard coded and cannot be changed Table 6 2 Mapping of BayRS Protocols and DiffServ Code Points Traffic Category NNSC Network Protocol DSCP Scheduler Critical Control Critical COPS frame relay CS7 111000 Strict Priority LMI LCP Echo Request MOSPF Hello OSPF Hello PPP LQR Network Control Network BGP DVMRP EGP CS6 110000 Strict Priority MOSPF OSPF PIM SM RIP VRRP Responsive Silver BootP DHCP DLSw AF21 010010 User DNS ICMP IGMP Configurable IPEX NTP RADIUS RSVP SNMP Timely Standard FTP IKE HTTP DF CS0 User non IP traffic 000000 Configurable Telnet TFTP
207. ntfDefaultRouteCost For additional information see Supplying a Default Route on an Interface in Configuring IP ARP RARP RIP and OSPF Services With the Technician Interface enter the following commands to set the wtfRipIntfDefaultRouteCost RIP default route cost attribute set wfRipIntfDefaultRouteCost lt value gt value is any integer from 0 through 15 The default value is 1 commit save config lt vol gt lt filename gt You must have Manager access to issue a set command The commit command causes the changes you made to the configuration to take effect in active memory but not in flash memory The save config command saves changes to a configuration file config and flash volume on the router Version 15 4 0 0 The following section describes how to enable the daylight savings time feature for the router using the Technician Interface Setting Daylight Savings Time Using the Technician Interface Daylight savings time is the time during which clocks are set one hour or more ahead of standard time to provide more daylight at the end of the working day during late spring summer and early fall In the United States we set the clock ahead one hour at 2 00 am on the first Sunday in April and set the clock back one hour at 2 00 am on the last Sunday in October 23 2 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Using Technician Interface Software When you enable the daylight savings time feature using the Technician Interface
208. ntiated Services The proper range of values for the id parameter is from 1 through 65535 The proper range is shown in the following table which lists RED parameters that can be configured under dsqms red their values and functions Parameter Values Function id integer 1 through 65535 Identifies the RED function You cannot change this parameter min threshold integer O through 100 default 20 Indicates the queue size below which no packets are dropped by RED max threshold integer 1 through 100 default 80 Indicates the queue size above which all packets are dropped by RED first order const second order const integer O through 100 default 1 integer O through 1000 default 10 Specifies the first order constant used when calculating drop probability based on the average queue fraction the queue size and the min threshold value Specifies the second order constant used when calculating drop probability based on the average queue fraction the queue size and the min threshold value 314470 15 6 Rev 00 6 1 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Version 15 2 0 0 The following section corrects the description of the Site Manager Priority parameter which appears in Appendix A of Configuring Differentiated Services Priority Parameter The description of the Priority parameter which appears on the COPS Server List window incorrectly states
209. o change the SVC inactivity timeout value navigate to the ATM prompt and enter ve inactivity timeout lt integer gt integer is the amount of time in seconds that the router waits before it disables inactive SVCs For example the following command sequence reenables the SVC inactivity timeout function on the ATM interface and sets the SVC inactivity timeout value to 2400 seconds atm 11 1 ve inactivity control enabled atm 11 1 vc inactivity timeout 2400 atm 11 1 Note The ve inactivity timeout parameter is not available for use with the ATM T3 E3 PMC module Instead the ve inact timeout parameter appears for this module The ve inact timeout parameter cannot be modified 314470 15 6 Rev 00 3 9 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Defining the Clocking Signal Source You can specify either an internal or external clocking source for time signals Internal clocking uses the router clock external clocking uses the line clock Using the BCC To change the source of the ATM clocking signal navigate to the ATM prompt for example box atm 11 1 and enter clock signal source lt source gt source is either internal default or external For example the following command changes the ATM clocking signal source to external atm 11 1 clock signal source external atm 11 1 Note The clock signal source parameter is not available for use with the ATM T3 E3 PMC module Instead the clk signal so
210. ocess of IP payload compression is briefly summarized here 1 In the IP header the original IP protocol type is replaced with the value for IPCOMP 108 2 Following the original IP header an IP compression header is added that contains the IP protocol field from the original IP header a flags field and the compression protocol index that is STAC LZS 3 The length of the IP header and its checksum are updated to reflect the compressed data and the addition of the new IP compression header Note If the total size of the compressed payload and the IP compression header is not smaller than the size of the original payload the IP packet is sent in its original uncompressed form with no IP compression header added to it For more information about IP payload compression refer to the following documents e Shacham A B Monsour R Pereria and M Thomas IP Payload Compression Protocol IPComp RFC 3173 Network Working Group September 2001 e Friend R and R Monsour IP Payload Compression Using LZS RFC 2395 Network Working Group December 1998 Implementation Notes Before you configure IP payload compression note the following considerations e To support IP payload compression Hi fn LZS compression is now available for the FRE 4 PPC module If you plan to use IP payload compression on a BN router with a FRE 4 PPC module see Hi fn LZS Compression for BN Routers with FRE 4 PPC Modules on page 5 7
211. ocols The Protocols menu opens 2 Choose IP The IP menu opens 3 Choose VRRP The IP VRRP Configuration Parameters window opens 4 Click on a virtual router instance ID to The configuration that pertains to the highlight it in the list of virtual routers highlighted router appears 5 Set the VRRP Address Ping parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 65 6 Click on Apply 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 17 2 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Chapter 18 Configuring X 25 Services Version 15 4 0 0 The following sections are new to Configuring X 25 Services Topic Page Enabling the QLLC XID Retry Feature 18 1 Setting the LLC Connect Timer 18 2 Accepting Incoming X 25 Calls for QLLC Service 18 2 The section X 25 PAD contains an amendment to Chapter 1 of Configuring X 25 Services Enabling the QLLC XID Retry Feature Some OS 2 PCs configured with QLLC service for X 25 may take 20 to 50 seconds to become ready to respond to an XID3 Consequently the PC ignores the first XID3 that it received and cannot establish a connection QLLC can now retransmit the XID3 every 10 seconds to the QLLC endstation until it receives a response You can enable or disable this feature using the XID Retry parameter on the QLLC Mapping Table Configuration window For information about accessing the parameters on the QLLC
212. ocols menu opens Choose IP The IP menu opens Choose Interfaces Select the IP interface configured on a GRE tunnel that you want to edit for IP payload compression The IP Interface List window opens Site Manager displays the parameter values for that interface Set the IP Payload Compression parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 50 Click on Apply and then click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Displaying Statistics for IP Payload Compression To display the list of GRE IP interfaces that are configured for IP payload compression enter the BCC command show hifn ipcomp be c gt show hifn ipcomp show hifn ipcomp hifn ipcomp entries Feb 17 2005 15 35 54 EST Circuit IP IP Name Address State GRE1 de dee Dek notpres GRE 2026202 notpres PPP_Demand 10 10 10 1 notpres _2 E111 192 32 140 36 notpres State disabled disabled 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Data Compression Services To display statistics for the interfaces configured for IP payload compression including the number of bytes compressed and decompressed enter the BCC command show hifn ipcomp stats box show hifn ipcomp stats show hifn ipcomp stats Feb 17 2005 15 36 08 EST hifn Performance And Data Statistics Ratio Compressor Decompressor CPC Packets Circuit
213. of the packet fragments with voice packets which are never fragmented configure the FRF 12 interleaving parameters which are associated with the interface on which this PVC is configured see the interleaving parameter descriptions beginning on page A 18 Instructions To enable FRF 12 fragmentation of data packets set this parameter to Enable MIB Object ID To disable FRF 12 fragmentation set this parameter to Disable When you change the value of this parameter the PVC restarts 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 2 1 66 Parameter FRF 12 Fragmentation Trigger Size Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt Frame Relay gt Services gt PVCs Default 80 Options 1 through 32767 Function Specifies the minimum size of a data packet to fragment on this PVC this number of bytes is the size of the fragmented packet payload Any packet smaller than the specified number of bytes will not be fragmented Instructions To change the minimum size of a data packet to fragment on this PVC set this MIB Object ID parameter to the appropriate number of bytes Otherwise accept the default value 80 bytes 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 2 1 68 A 30 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Frame Relay Service Record Parameter Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID You use the following parameter to specify a line speed value for a frame relay service record Optional Line Speed Co
214. ols window choose When you select PIM IGMP is the following protocols automatically selected e IP e PIM 2 Click on OK The IP Configuration window opens 3 Set the following parameters e IP Address e Subnet Mask e Transmit Beast Addr e UnNumbered Assoc Address For information about these parameters click on Help 4 Click on OK The PIM Global Configuration window opens 5 Set the Source Specific Multicast parameter to Enable Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 53 continued 13 6 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring IP Multicasting and Multimedia Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 6 Click on OK 7 Inthe Initial IGMP Global Configuration window click on OK to accept the default values System responds If this is the first IGMP interface on the router the Initial IGMP Global Configuration window opens Otherwise you return to the Configuration Manager window You return to the Configuration Manager window PIM SSM and IGMP Version 3 are now running on the router with default values for all global and interface parameters For information about customizing IGMP or PIM SSM parameters see Customizing IGMP Version 3 and PIM SSM on page 13 9 Editing IGMP and PIM Parameters for PIM SSM If IGMP Version 2 and PIM SM are already configured on the router and you want to configure IGMP Version 3 and PIM SSM y
215. on and serial number of the compression hardware image Displays the router s software image for each slot including the integration that is the source of the image the date and time of the image s creation and the file name that contains the image 24 2 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Using the Bay Command Console BCC memory Displays memory configuration and capacity information for all slots or a specific slot Slot Slot number Local Memory Total memory capacity in megabytes MB of the processor on the slot Global Memory Current memory configuration in MB of the processor on the slot Total Memory Total local and global memory in MB processors Displays processor information for all slots The table includes the serial number and revision of the processor on each router slot proms Displays PROM information for all slots The table includes the revision and build date of the bootstrap PROM and the diagnostics PROM slots Displays hardware information about all slots in the system The table includes information about the processor module and link module for each slot as well as the module type revision and serial number The revision and serial numbers are in decimal format For the AN the table indicates that the AN has an 802 3 repeater HUB by indicating that the link module is an ANSEDSH For the ASN the table displays the revision and serial number of the chassis processor module and the network module type revis
216. on for frame relay WANs to ensure high voice quality for VoIP packets transmitted with data packets over links slower than T1 speeds FRF 12 fragmentation and interleaving is supported on all frame relay interfaces other than dial and multiline multilink interfaces across all BayRS router platforms subject to memory and performance constraints The BayRS implementation of FRF 12 produces better voice quality by addressing the problem of jitter due to large data packets being transmitted between small VoIP packets When FRF 12 is enabled large data packets are fragmented into smaller packets and higher priority voice packets are sent between interleaved with the data packet fragments VoIP packets are never fragmented Data packets are fragmented to a fixed size as they are transmitted over the WAN You can change the default data fragment size and the number of voice packets to be interleaved between data packet fragments By default one voice packet followed by one data packet fragment are transmitted over the WAN after fragmentation and interleaving Interleaving of fragments is supported over a single VC or across multiple VCs on an interface In a multiple VC configuration all VCs must be configured for FRF 12 each VC can be configured to carry a certain type of traffic for example EF AFxx or DF 314470 15 6 Rev 00 9 15 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Packet Fragmentation and Reassembly The en
217. onfigured together these features are executed on an outgoing PVC in this order 1 Traffic shaping with DSQMS takes place when FRF 12 is configured you must use traffic shaping with DSQMS 2 FRE9 compresses traffic from the shaped PVCs 3 FRF 12 fragments the compressed packets On an incoming PVC reassembly of fragmented packets is done before decompression Note Testing indicates that configuring frame relay traffic shaping with DSQMS FRF 9 and FRF 12 on the same PVC is very CPU intensive and performance degradation is expected It is recommended that either FRE 9 or FRF 12 be used whichever is applicable to the network need Configuration Considerations Before you configure FRF 12 fragmentation and interleaving be aware of the following considerations e You may need to configure ingress diffserv filters to mark voice and data packets with diffserv code points DSCPs Make sure that VoIP packets are marked with the expedited forwarding EF diffserv marking in the IP header e Implementing FRF 12 increases the volume of small packets High volumes of small packets are known to affect the performance of BayRS routers You should set the data fragment size as close to the VoIP packet size as possible to optimize the link For improved VoIP performance data fragments are needed but for CPU performance you want fewer fragments You may need to fine tune the data fragment size to find one that works best for your
218. ons 1 Configure DSQMS on the interface If necessary add DSQMS to the list of protocols on the interface 2 Configure traffic shaping on the PVC or PVCs Set values for these traffic shaping parameters committed information rate CIR committed burst and excess burst 3 Enable FRF 12 fragmentation on the PVCs and reset the data packet fragmentation size if necessary 4 Enable FRF 12 interleaving on the interface and reset the weighting of data packet fragments and voice packets in the stream if necessary 314470 15 6 Rev 00 9 19 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice For information and instructions on configuring a circuit on a slot and connector see Configuring WAN Line Services or Configuring Ethernet FDDI and Token Ring Services If you will use the BCC to configure FRF 12 parameters go to the next section If you will use Site Manager go to Using Site Manager on page 9 23 Using the BCC The following sections describe how to use the BCC to configure FRF 12 fragmentation and interleaving on the router Configure DSQMS on the Interface To configure DSQMS on the interface where the frame relay PVCs are configured navigate to the appropriate interface and enter the dsqms command box serial 3 1 serial 3 1 dsqms dsgqms serial 3 1 S31 Note For complete information about configuring DSQMS queues and classifiers see Chapter 2 and Appendix B of Configuring Differentiated Services
219. oose Global The PIM Global Configuration window opens 10 11 Set the Equal Cost Multipath parameter to Enable Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 53 Click on OK You return to the Configuration Manager window 314470 15 6 Rev 00 13 11 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Configuring PIM SSM Address Ranges When you enable PIM SSM the multicast group address range 232 0 0 0 232 255 255 255 is reserved for PIM SSM You can change the group address range or create more than one PIM SSM range multiple SSM ranges cannot overlap You can configure any multicast address range as an SSM range To add or change multicast group address ranges for PIM SSM complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols 2 Choose IP The Protocols menu opens The IP menu opens 3 Choose IGMP IGMP Relay The IGMP menu opens 4 Choose Global The IGMP Global Configuration window opens Set the SSM Ranges parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 38 Click on OK You return to the Configuration Manager window 13 12 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring IP Multicasting and Multimedia Services Editing IGMP Interface Fine tuning Parameters IGMP interface fine tuning parameters are set to defau
220. or SNMP packet Traffic Filters and DSCP Tagging of ICMP SNMP and Telnet Packets Differentiated services traffic filters that mark incoming packets can affect the DSCP tagging of ICMP SNMP and Telnet packets unless you configure the filter to match specific criteria For example assume that a traffic filter has been configured to mark all packets traversing the router as EF If an SNMP connection is initiated with the router and the incoming SNMP packets are marked as AF41 the diffserv traffic filter will mark the outgoing SNMP response packets with a DSCP of EF instead of AF41 That is the DSCP specified by the traffic filter will be used instead of the DSCP in the incoming SNMP packets To avoid unexpected DSCP tagging of ICMP SNMP and Telnet packets configure diffserv traffic filters to match specific criteria such as the protocol ID or the source or destination network For complete information about configuring diffserv traffic filters see Chapter 3 of Configuring Differentiated Services DSCP Tagging of IPsec Packets The DSCP in the IP headers of IPsec packets remains the same as the DSCP of the original encapsulated IP packet Therefore IPsec packets are queued based on the DSCP of the original packets and are not subject to default queue mapping 314470 15 6 Rev 00 6 7 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Mapping of Router Generated Packets to DSQMS Queues After they are marked with a DSCP tag
221. or Specific Peers 0 0 7 5 Specifying a Peer for Custom DLSw Priority Queue Configuration 7 5 Customizing the DLSw Priority Queues for a Specific Peer eeen 7 6 Enabling and Disabling a Peers DLSw Priority Queues gietarstanentbans meee 7 8 314470 15 6 Rev 00 vii Creating and Enabling Priority Outbound Filters for DLSw traffic 0 7 8 Enabling and Disabling DLSw Outbound Filters cceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 7 9 Specifying Match Criteria for DLSw Priority Outbound Filters T 7 10 Specifying the Action for DLSw Priority Outbound Filters cceeseeeeees 7 12 Chapter 8 Configuring Ethernet FDDI and Token Ring Services VERSION 1A 000 cc cescriourranersdectepednteet RA 8 1 Specifying the DSQMS Line Speed 006 diesen ads ee E 8 1 Router Processing of Tagged Frames scenerne errr evttades in 8 2 Implementation Considerations cccccceeeceeeeeeeceneeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeseeaeeesseeenaes 8 2 Adding a Tagged Circuit to an Unconfigured 10BASE T or 100BASE T Interface 8 4 Adding a Tagged Circuit to an Existing 1OBASE T or 100BASE T Interface 8 5 s a a E AE ten tere mee enter reer ner EE tern tener rece cer E renter cree E 8 7 Implementation Note for the ARN Router 05 inin E E n BT TEET 1 OON aeaa E 8 8 Using the BCC to Configure 802 1Q Tagged Circuits eens EEST 8 8 Adding a Tagged Circuit to a 1OBASE T or 100
222. oring and Reporting for HSSI Interfaces Before Version 15 6 BayRS supported PPP link quality monitoring LQM and link quality reporting LQR over standard synchronous interfaces only With the release of Version 15 6 BayRS supports PPP LQM and LQR over High Speed Serial Interfaces HSSI as well Note The BayRS implementation of PPP LQM and LQR has not changed for this release The only change is that you can now configure PPP link quality monitoring and reporting on HSSI lines For complete information about the BayRS implementation of PPP LQM and LQR see Configuring PPP Services Using Site Manager To configure PPP link quality monitoring and reporting on a HSSI interface complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Protocols menu opens choose Protocols 2 Choose PPP The PPP menu opens 3 Choose Interfaces The PPP Interface List window opens 4 Click on the HSSI interface for which you The PPP interface values for the HSSI want to configure link quality monitoring interface are displayed and reporting 5 Click on Lines The PPP Line Lists window opens continued 314470 15 6 Rev 00 14 9 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 6 Set the following parameters e Link Quality Protocol Peer Link Quality
223. ority and weighted queues in certain configurations when higher traffic levels are seen in these queues To enable the interface to dequeue packets at line rate set this parameter to Enable To disable dequeuing at line rate on the interface select Disable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 16 1 1 19 314470 15 6 Rev 00 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice You use the following parameters to configure FRF 12 fragment interleaving on an interface Parameter FRF 12 Interleaving Enable Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt DSQMS gt Interface Default Disable Options Enable Disable Function Enables or disables FRF 12 fragmentation interleaving on this interface FRF 12 interleaving is done only on packets in the DSQMS shaped pool To use FRF 12 fragmentation you must enable this parameter and also set FRF 12 and traffic shaping parameters on the PVCs configured on this physical interface Instructions To enable FRF 12 fragmentation interleaving on this interface set this parameter MIB Object ID to Enable To disable FRF 12 fragmentation interleaving set this parameter to Disable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 16 1 1 38 Parameter FRE 12 NonPriority High Water Mark Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt DSQMS gt Interface Default 3 Options 1 through 64 Function Specifies the maximum number of consecutive data packet fragments to be sent to the link with no voice packets to interleave When
224. ort 5430 with a T3 E3 connector navigate to the box prompt and enter atm slot lt s ot_number gt pci slot lt pci_s ot gt module lt module_number gt connector lt connector_number gt mode t3 e3 slot_number is the number of the chassis slot containing the ATM T3 E3 PMC module 314470 15 6 Rev 00 3 1 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice pci_siot is the number of the PCI slot containing the ATM T3 E3 PMC module The PCI slot number for the ATM T3 E3 PMC module is always 1 module_number is always 2 for the ATM interface connector_number is the number of a connector on the ATM T3 E3 PMC module mode t3 or mode e3 specifies whether the ATM interface is a T3 or E3 interface For example the following command adds an ATM T3 interface to the Passport 5430 configuration on slot 1 PCI slot 1 module 2 connector 1 box atm slot 1 pci slot 1 module 2 connector 1 mode t3 atm 1 1 2 1 To configure T3 E3 parameters use the following procedures Specifying the Cable Length To specify the cable length navigate to the ATM interface prompt for example box atm 1 1 2 1 atm e3 and enter cable length lt ength gt length is either short default or long Specify short for a cable less than 225 feet long specify long for a cable length of 225 feet or more For example the following command changes the cable length to long atm e3 1 1 2 1 cable length long atm e3 1 1 2 1 Specifying the Clear Alarm
225. ot The console displays one of the following messages after the verification terminates prom slot lt slot ID gt completed successfully prom PROM data does not match file data on slot lt slot ID gt If the operation succeeds the new images stored in the boot and diagnostic PROMs run when you reboot the router If the operation fails the console displays a message describing the cause of the failure 314470 15 6 Rev 00 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Task 2 Updating the Existing Configuration File This section describes how to upgrade your existing configuration files to support the new Version 15 x features Optionally you can create a new Version 15 x configuration file to replace your existing configuration file for the router Booting the Existing Configuration File To upgrade an existing configuration file to Version 15 x boot it on a router running a Version 15 x router software image The router software loads the existing configuration file into router memory and updates the configuration file s version stamp to match the Version 15 x router software It does not however automatically save that version to the file on the flash card until you save the configuration file in dynamic mode After you save the file in dynamic mode reboot the router using the updated configuration file Saving the Configuration File in Dynamic Mode After you boot the router with a Version 15 x image and the e
226. ou need to edit IGMP and PIM parameters as follows e Configure the IGMP interface to support Version 3 e Enable the source specific multicast mode for PIM e Disable the PIM candidate BSR and RP configurations if you plan to run PIM SSM only To edit IGMP parameters to support Version 3 and PIM SSM complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 2 Choose IP The IP menu opens 3 Choose IGMP IGMP Relay The IGMP menu opens continued 314470 15 6 Rev 00 13 7 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 4 Choose Interfaces System responds The IGMP Interface Parameters window opens 5 Select the interface that you want to run The values for that interface are displayed PIM SSM on in the window 6 Set the Net Version parameter to IGMPV3 7 Click on Apply and then click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window To edit PIM parameters to support IGMP Version 3 and PIM SSM complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 2 Choose IP The IP menu opens 3 Choose PIM The PIM menu opens
227. outbound filter on a circuit it is enabled by default To disable the filter navigate to the traffic filter prompt for example box serial 3 1 protocol priority ip outbound filter lt fi ter_name gt and enter state disabled If you set this parameter to disabled the specified outbound traffic filter will be disabled on this interface Setting this parameter to disabled is useful if you want to temporarily disable the outbound traffic filter rather than delete it To re enable the outbound filter navigate to the traffic filter prompt for example box serial 3 1 protocol priority ip outbound filter lt filter_name gt and enter state enabled For example the following command enables the outbound filter on the selected circuit ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 state enabled ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 Specifying Match Criteria for IP to IP Outbound Traffic Filters The match criteria in a filter specify which fields in the IP header of each packet must contain the values that you specify You can also specify certain fields in the headers of TCP and UDP packets contained in the IP data field of IP packets To prepare to specify the filtering criteria navigate to the traffic filter prompt for example box serial 3 1 protocol priority ip outbound filter lt ilter_name gt and enter match ip ip 16 10 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization You can
228. over Frame Relay Implementation Agreement FRF 9 Frame Relay Forum Technical Committee January 22 1996 Implementation of FRF 9 Compression on BayRS Routers The BayRS implementation of FRF 9 data compression provides the following e FRE9 data compression is supported on PVCs and SVCs e FRE9 compression is not supported for multilink frame relay circuits or for dial interfaces e Compression is available in software only e BayRS implementation of FRE 9 compression uses only one compression algorithm Hi fn Stac LZS as per FRF 9 Annex A Note The Hi fn LZS compression software is licensed from Hi fn Inc You must separately purchase a license for the Hi fn LZS compression software which is delivered on a separate CD by Nortel Networks e Compression options and compression history synchronization are in conformance with FRF 9 Annex A BayRS supports only one compression history or context per VC which is the default value in FRF 9 Annex A e FRE 9 standard contains two modes of operation for the DCPCP Mode 1 and Mode 2 BayRS supports Mode 1 only e Error detection method history context selection and compression process options are as provided for by FRF 9 Annex A and selected by Mode 1 negotiation of that standard Configuration Considerations Before you configure FRF 9 be aware of the following considerations e You cannot enable both WCP and FRE 9 compression on a VC WOP is enabled by default so
229. ow opens Figure 21 3 asking you to confirm your decision to save the file Site Manager File saved Figure 21 3 File Saved Window 6 Click on OK This action saves the configuration file config to the router s flash card with the Version 15 x version stamp 7 Reboot the router with the updated configuration file 21 10 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Chapter 22 Using Technician Interface Scripts Version 15 1 0 0 The Technician Interface is a command line interface that Nortel Networks support technicians can use to troubleshoot and configure Nortel Networks devices The following section is an amendment to Using Technician Interface Scripts Using Scripts and Aliases to Dynamically Configure a Router Use of rapid fire scripts or aliases to dynamically set a router s configuration via the MIBs can put the router into a corrupted state and cause connectivity issues When you use the Technician Interface to launch scripts or aliases to configure the router be sure to include pauses 1 or 2 seconds to allow sufficient time for the router to make the required changes to the MIBs 314470 15 6 Rev 00 22 1 Chapter 23 Using Technician Interface Software Version 15 1 0 0 The Technician Interface is a command line interface that Nortel Networks support technicians can use to troubleshoot and configure Nortel Networks devices The following sections are amendments to Using Technician Interface Software Di
230. parameter descriptions beginning on page A 14 2 Choose DSQMS The DSQMS menu opens 3 Choose RED The Edit RED Parameters window opens 4 Click on Add 5 6 Click on Apply then click on Done steps 4 through 6 7 To configure more RED instances repeat 8 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Creating DSQMS Queues and Associated Traffic Classifiers To create a DSQMS queue and its associated traffic classifiers perform the following steps Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 2 Choose DSQMS The DSQMS menu opens continued 6 16 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Differentiated Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 3 Choose Interface System responds The Edit DSQMS Parameters window opens 4 Click on Queues 5 Click on Add The Edit DSQMS Queue List window opens The Edit DSQMS Parameters window opens 6 Set the Enable parameter to Enable Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 19 7 Set other queue parameters as needed Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 19 8 Click on OK You return to the Edit DSQMS Queue List window 9 To configure a traffic classifier for the queue click on Classifier
231. pecify an action navigate to the actions prompt for example box serial 3 1 protocol priority ip outbound filter lt filter_name gt actions and enter action accept drop For example to change the action to drop enter the following command actions ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 action drop actions ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 To log an entry to the system Events log for every packet that matches the filter criteria and ranges navigate to the ip outbound filter prompt for example box serial 3 1 protocol priority ip outbound filter lt filter_name gt and enter action log on For example to log entries to the Events log enter the following command actions ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 action log on actions ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S531 The default value for this parameter is off 16 20 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization Prioritizing Actions You can apply the following actions to outbound traffic filters for WAN protocols e High Directs packets that match the filter criteria and ranges to the High queue e Low Directs packets that match the filter criteria and ranges to the Low queue e Length Uses the length of packets to determine the priority queue Outbound traffic filters with a prioritizing action are called priority filters Note You can apply prioritizing actions only to MCE MCT1 and synchronous int
232. pgrade and verify PROMs on a router begin at the Technician Interface prompt and complete the following steps 1 Establish a Technician Interface session with the router Enter the following command at the Technician Interface prompt Manager For more information about how to open a Technician Interface session with the router see Using Technician Interface Software Insert a flash card with contiguous free space sufficient to accommodate the PROM images that you want to transfer to the router To determine the amount of contiguous free space display the directory of the flash volume by entering the following command at the Technician Interface prompt dir lt volume_no gt volume_no is the slot in which the flash card resides If you need more contiguous free space for the PROM image a Delete unnecessary or obsolete files b Compact the contents of the flash card by entering compact lt volume_no gt The following message appears Compacting file system on volume lt vol gt This may take several minutes Please wait 100 Complete Compaction completed The space is compacted when the Technician Interface prompt reappears c Verify that the amount of contiguous free space and available free space on the volume are the same by entering dir lt volume_no gt 314470 15 6 Rev 00 21 5 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice 3 Transfer the PROM image files for example freboot exe and
233. ponds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols Choose PPP The Protocols menu opens 3 Choose Interfaces The PPP Interface List window opens 4 Click on the interface for which you want to set the fragment size Click on Classes Click on the class for which you want to set the fragment size The PPP Multiclass Classes window opens only if Multilink MultiClass is enabled for the selected interface Set the Fragment Size parameter Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on A 60 8 Click on Apply 10 9 Click on Done Repeat steps 5 through 9 for each class for which you want to set the fragment size You return to the PPP Interface List window 11 Click on Done You return to the PPP Interface List window 12 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 14 6 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring PPP Services Enabling and Disabling Multilink Multiclass on Dial up Lines For dial in connections in addition to enabling the Multilink MultiClass Enable parameter on the PPP Interface List window Figure 14 1 on page 14 3 you also must enable multilink multiclass on the dial up line You enable and disable multilink multiclass on dial up lines by setting the Multilink Multiclass for Dialup parameter on the PPP Line Lists window shown in Figure 14 3 Note Multilink multiclas
234. prioritization parameters Customizing Global Parameters for DLSw Protocol Prioritization To meet the specific needs of your site you can modify the default settings of one or more of the following DLSw protocol prioritization global parameters e max queue buffers unconfig peers specifies the maximum number of packets in each queue e max queue size unconfig peers specifies the maximum size in bytes of each queue e default bandwidth specifies the number of queues to be used and allocates the bandwidth for each max queue buffers unconfig peers To specify the maximum number of packets in each queue navigate to the dlsw protocol prioritization prompt for example box disw disw protocol prioritization and enter 7 2 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring DLSw Services max queue buffers unconfig peers lt va ue gt value is an integer between 10 and 2147483647 inclusive The default value is 50 For example to specify 100 as the maximum number of packets in each default queue enter dlsw protocol prioritization max queue buffers unconfig peers 100 dlisw protocol prioritization max queue size unconfig peers To specify the maximum size in bytes of each default queue navigate to the dlsw protocol prioritization prompt for example box disw disw protocol prioritization and enter max queue size unconfig peers lt value gt value is an integer between 5 000 and 2 147 483 647 inclusive The default va
235. pt the default value 30 percent 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 16 2 1 26 Idle Loss Rate Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt DSQMS gt Interface gt Queues 30 1 through 99 Specifies the percentage of buffer capacity that must empty for 1 second or more for DSQMS to compute a smaller average queue size for use by RED To specify a different percentage enter an integer from through 99 Otherwise accept the default value 30 percent 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 16 2 1 27 A 24 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters DSQMS Queue Classifier Parameters The Edit DSQMS Classifier List window Figure A 4 contains parameters for a DSQMS classifier configured on the queue These parameters let you specify the DSCP in the traffic header that this classifier will match as well as the DSQMS RED instance used by the classifier E Edit Dsqms Classifier List e Done Add Iv Values Help Figure A 4 Edit DSQMS Classifier List Window Parameter Classifier ID Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt DSQMS gt Interface gt Queues gt Classifier gt Add Default Null Options 8 digit differentiated services code point binary octet Function Specifies a DSCP value as an 8 digit binary octet Traffic that matches this value is treated according to the attributes configured for the associated queue and according to the DSQMS RED instance attributes if you also set the optional Classifier
236. r Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Enable Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt DSQMS gt Interface gt Queues Disable Enable Disable Enables and disables this DSQMS queue To enable this DSQMS queue select Enable To disable this DSQMS queue select Disabled 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 16 2 1 2 Type Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt DSQMS gt Interface gt Queues Priority Priority Weighted Selects the queue scheduling type strict priority or weighted deficit round robin DRR To set the queue scheduling type to weighted deficit round robin select Weighted To set the queue scheduling type to strict priority select Priority 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 16 2 1 6 Best Effort Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt DSQMS gt Interface gt Queues No No Yes Specifies whether to use this queue for best effort traffic By default DSQMS selects the weighted queue with the lowest configured weight as the best effort queue if all weighted queues have the same weight the last one created becomes the best effort queue If priority queues only are configured on this interface DSQMS selects the queue with the lowest priority if all queues have the same priority the last one created becomes the best effort queue Use this parameter to override the default selection and s
237. r for which the action parameter is set to length the value for that parameter changes to accept and the IP traffic filter is not deleted Dial Service Actions You can apply the following actions to outbound traffic filters for interfaces configured as dial up lines e No Call Packets that match the filter criteria and ranges are dropped and do not initiate a dial connection By default packets transmitted on dial on demand lines always trigger the router to establish a connection e No Reset Packets that match the filter criteria and ranges are processed but do not reset the inactivity timer Note Although No Call and No Reset are available when creating any outbound traffic filter these actions are useful only on dial up interfaces such as synchronous modem lines or MCT1 interfaces configured with ISDN PRI To enable the no call feature navigate to the actions prompt for example box serial 3 1 protocol priority ip outbound filter lt filter_name gt actions and enter no call on For example to drop packets that match the filter criteria and ranges enter the following command actions ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 no call on actions ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 To enable the no reset feature navigate to the actions prompt for example box serial 3 1 protocol priority ip outbound filter lt filter_name gt actions and enter no reset on 314470 15 6 Rev 00 16 23
238. r named dsap_Oland02_q3 for a peer with an IP address of 192 168 1 1 navigate to the filter s match prompt box dlsw disw priority outbound filter dsap_01and02_q3 192 168 1 1 match and enter match dsap_0land02_q3 192 168 1 1 pri dlsw dsap 1 2 match dsap_0land02_q3 192 168 1 1 Specifying SAP source addresses To specify a SAP source address as a filter criteria navigate to the peer filter s match prompt for example box dlsw dlsw priority outbound filter lt filter_name gt lt peer_address gt match and enter pri disw ssap lt address_range gt lt address_range gt is the range of SAP source addresses for the filter Valid values are in the range of 0 65535 inclusive For a range with only one value enter only one SAP source address The BCC automatically uses that value for both the minimum and maximum values in the address range For example to specify a range of SAP source addresses from 4 to 5 as a match criteria for a filter named dsap_Oland02_gq3 for a peer with an IP address of 192 168 1 1 navigate to the filter s match prompt box disw disw priority outbound filter dsap_01and02_q3 192 168 1 1 match and enter match dsap_0land02_q3 192 168 1 1 pri disw ssap 4 5 match dsap_0land02_q3 192 168 1 1 Specifying the Action for DLSw Priority Outbound Filters You can specify the following actions for DLSw priority outbound filters e queue specifies to which DLSw priority queue 0 9 traffi
239. r network point through third party Network Address Translation NAT routers that require a unique identifier for each ICMP echo request message A new global IP MIB wflpBaselcmpEchoUnildEnable enables and disables this feature When this feature is enabled a unique identifier is added to each ICMP echo request message This enhancement to ICMP echo requests is disabled by default You can use the BCC or Site Manager to enable and disable this feature as required 314470 15 6 Rev 00 11 5 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Using the BCC To enable or disable unique identifiers for ICMP echo requests go to the global IP prompt for example box ip and enter icmp echo request unique id lt state gt state is one of the following disable default enable For example the following command enables unique identifiers for ICMP echo requests ip icmp echo request unique id enable ip Using Site Manager To enable or disable unique identifiers for ICMP echo requests complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 2 Choose IP 3 Choose Global The Edit IP Global Parameters window opens 4 Set the Icmp Echo Request Unique Id parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 47 5 Click on OK You return to t
240. raffic can flow over the interface When the interface is disabled traffic cannot flow over the interface To disable or reenable the ATM interface navigate to the ATM interface prompt for example box atm 1 1 2 1 atm e3 and enter state disabled enabled For example the following commands disable and reenable the ATM interface atm e3 1 1 2 1 state disabled atm e3 1 1 2 1 state enabled atm e3 1 1 2 1 314470 15 6 Rev 00 3 5 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Using Site Manager To create an ATM circuit for a T3 or E3 connection on a Passport 5430 complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM DS3 E3 interface ATM1 in slot 1 PCI slot 1 module 2 The Add Circuit window opens Click on OK to accept the default circuit name Click on Physical Layer Configuration The ATM Configuration window opens The Physical Layer Configuration window opens 4 Click on either DS3 or E3 The Port Parameters window opens 5 To configure port parameters set the following parameters as needed Enable Disable Line Type Setup Alarm Threshold seconds Clear Alarm Threshold seconds Loopback Configuration Primary Clock Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions in ATM Line Parameters beginning on page A 3 Click on OK The Physical Layer Configur
241. ration To specify a peer for custom DLSw priority queue configuration navigate to the global dlsw prompt for example box disw and enter peer queue configuration peer ip addr lt value gt 314470 15 6 Rev 00 7 5 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice value is the IP address of the peer for which you want to configure custom DLSw priority queues For example to specify custom DLSw priority queue configuration for a peer with an IP address of 192 168 1 1 enter disw peer queue configuration peer ip addr 192 168 1 1 dlsw peer queue configuration 192 168 1 1 Customizing the DLSw Priority Queues for a Specific Peer For a specified peer you can override the currently configured global DLSw protocol prioritization parameters for the following elements e maximum buffer size for each queue e maximum number of packets per queue e allocated bandwidth for each of the 10 DLSw priority queues 0 9 max queue buffers To specify the maximum number of packets for each of a peer s DLSw priority queues navigate to the peer s dlsw peer queue configuration prompt for example box disw disw peer queue configuration lt peer P address gt and enter max queue buffers lt value gt value is the maximum number of packets allowed in each of this peer s priority queues The range of valid values is from 10 to 2147483647 inclusive The default is 50 For example to specify 200 as the maximum number of packets
242. re you configure 802 1Q tagging on a router note the following considerations e 802 1Q tagging is supported on 1OBASE T and 100BASE T interfaces it is not supported on other LAN interfaces e 802 1Q tagging cannot be used to extend a VLAN across multiple devices e The VLAN type port based protocol based address based and so on is ignored by the router 8 2 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Ethernet FDDI and Token Ring Services Table 8 1 lists the platform modules that support 802 1Q tagging Table 8 1 Supported Modules for 802 1Q Tagging Platform Ethernet Interface Type Passport 2430 10 100 Base Unit Passport 2430 ARN Second Ethernet Module Ethernet Base Unit ARN ARN 48VDC Ethernet Base Unit ARN 10 100 TX UTP Base Unit ARN Ethernet Expansion Module ARN Ethernet and Tri Serial Expansion Module ARN Ethernet and 7 Serial Expansion Module Passport 5430 Dual 10 100 Ethernet Base Unit ASN Dual Ethernet Net Module BLN BCN Quad Port Ethernet FRE2 060 BLN BCN Quad Port Ethernet High Speed Filters FRE2 060 BLN BCN Dual Ethernet Dual Sync No Filters FRE2 060 BLN BCN Dual Ethernet Dual Sync Max Filters FRE2 060 BLN BCN Ethernet Sync Async No Filters ESAF FRE2 O60E BLN BCN Ethernet Sync Async With Filters ESAFNF FRE2 060E BLN BCN Quad Port 10 100Base TX with FRE4 P
243. received from one side of a border router from being passed to the other side of the router The bootstrap border router allows you to create two or more PIM bootstrap domains in one PIM domain so that the rendezvous point RP information kept in the routers can be different To specify a PIM bootstrap router as a border router complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols System responds The Protocols menu opens 2 Choose IP The IP menu opens 3 Choose PIM The PIM menu opens continued 314470 15 6 Rev 00 13 1 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 4 Choose Interface The PIM Interface Parameters window opens 5 Set the Bootstrap Border parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description in PIM Interface Parameter on page A 57 6 Click on OK You return to the Configuration Manager window Version 15 6 0 0 This section provides instructions on how to configure IGMP Version 3 and PIM SSM as well as how to configure static RP routers for PIM SM This chapter includes the following topics Topic Page Overview of IGMP Version 3 and PIM SSM 13 2 Starting IGMP Version 3 and PIM SSM 13 5 Customizing IGMP Version 3 and PIM SSM 13 9 Configuring the PIM SM PIM
244. red on this service record and to generate alarms as required If you accept the default value 0 the line speed of the interface as a whole is displayed in network management applications that use the ifSpeed MIB variable to monitor traffic statistics Note The value that you set with this parameter is for reporting purposes only it has no effect on the actual performance of the virtual circuit Accept the default value 0 to allow the ifSpeed MIB variable to report the interface speed Otherwise enter an integer value up to the maximum line speed of this interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 2 1 17 A 10 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Automated Security Association IKE Parameters You use the following parameters to define a cryptographic key for creating IKE SAs between routers Parameter Pre shared Key ascii Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IKE Configuration Manager gt Edit Circuit gt Protocols gt Edit IP gt IKE Default None Options Up to 24 ASCII characters Function Used as a cryptographic key for creating IKE SAs between routers IKE is then used to create automated SAs for data packets Instructions Enter an ASCII string up to 24 characters Configure the same preshared key on MIB Object ID the destination router None Parameter Pre shared Key hex Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IKE Configuration Manager gt Edit Circuit gt Protocol
245. red peers To enable DLSw protocol prioritization for unconfigured peers using the currently configured values default or customized for the global DLSw protocol prioritization parameters navigate to the global dlsw prompt for example box disw and enter disw protocol prioritization pp unconfigured peers enabled For example to enable DLSw protocol prioritization for unconfigured peers using the currently configured values for the global DLSw protocol prioritization parameters navigate to the global dlsw prompt and enter disw dlsw protocol prioritization pp unconfigured peers enabled dlsw protocol prioritization The default setting for pp unconfigured peers is disabled To disable DLSw protocol prioritization for unconfigured peers after enabling it navigate to the global dlsw prompt and enter disw protocol prioritization pp unconfigured peers disabled Customizing and Enabling DLSw Priority Queues for Specific Peers You can fine tune DLSw priority queues for a specific peer by performing the following tasks e Specify a peer for custom DLSw priority queue configuration e Customize the DLSw priority queue parameters for the specified peer e Enable the specified peer s custom DLSw priority queue configuration Note Peer specific priority queue configurations take precedence over any currently enabled global DLSw protocol prioritization queue configuration Specifying a Peer for Custom DLSw Priority Queue Configu
246. resented as bits values in the parameter field as follows 0x00000001 Bootstrap procedure 0x00000002 Hello procedure 0x00000004 Join prune send procedure 0x00000008 Registration procedure 0x00000010 Maintaining PIM route table 0x00000020 Assert procedure 0x00000040 Data forwarding tree switching 0x00000080 PIM main gate processing 0x00000100 PIM Cct gate general processing 0x00000200 PIM route change processing 0x00000400 PIM G processing 0x00000800 PIM pte oif timers 0x00001000 PIM MTM signals messages 0x00002000 PIM PIM messages 0x00004000 PIM protocol messages first data 0x00008000 Join prune received 0x00010000 PIM utilities including timers 0x00020000 PIM SSM related messages MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 14 1 6 A 56 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters PIM Interface Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID You use the following parameter to determine whether the router interface will act as a PIM bootstrap border interface Bootstrap Border Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt PIM gt Interface Disable Disable Enable When you set this parameter to Enable this PIM interface acts as a PIM bootstrap border interface A bootstrap border interface discards both incoming
247. rformance defect or anomaly is still present when time interval expires the device driver records a performance failure and logs an event message Set the timer value in seconds 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 26 10 1 17 A 8 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Clear Alarm Threshold seconds Configuration Manager gt ATM1 gt Physical Layer Configuration gt DS3 or E3 2 2 to 10 Specifies the clear time in seconds for performance failure conditions If the defect or anomaly clears within this interval the device driver records a performance cleared condition and logs an event message Set the timer value in seconds 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 26 10 1 18 Loopback Configuration Configuration Manager gt ATM1 gt Physical Layer Configuration gt DS3 or E3 No Loopback No Loopback Payload Loopback Line Loopback Forces the interface into loopback mode The far end or intermediate equipment then performs diagnostics on the network between that equipment and the T3 E3 interface After testing set this parameter to No Loopback to return the interface to a normal operating mode e No Loopback Returns the interface to non loopback operation e Payload Loopback The received signal at this interface is looped through the device Typically the received si
248. ri ip ip dest udp ports Destination UDP port through which traffic is entering the network continued 16 12 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization Table 16 1 TCP and UDP Match Criteria Parameters continued Parameter Specifies pri ip ip dest tcp udp ports Both destination TCP and UDP ports through which traffic is entering the network pri ip ip src tcp udp ports Both source TCP and UDP ports through which traffic is exiting the network range_of_ports is a space delimited list Table 16 2 lists some common TCP port values Table 16 2 Common TCP Ports Description TCP Port FTP 20 21 Telnet 23 SMTP 25 DNS 53 Gopher 70 World Wide Web http 80 84 DLSw read port 2065 DLSw write port 2067 Table 16 3 lists some common UDP port values Table 16 3 Common UDP Ports Description UDP Port DNS 53 TFTP 69 SNMP 161 SNMPTRAP 162 314470 15 6 Rev 00 16 13 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Example Source TCP Port This example specifies source TCP ports 20 80 and 53 through 56 as match criteria for the filter template telnet in match ip ip ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 pri ip ip src tcp ports 20 80 53 56 match ip ip ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 Example Destination TCP Port This example specifies destination TCP ports 3
249. rity ethernet 2 1 normal queue size 50 protocol priority ethernet 2 1 Specifying the Low Queue Size To specify the maximum number of packets in the Low queue at any one time regardless of packet size navigate to the protocol priority prompt for example box ethernet 2 1 protocol priority and enter low queue size lt value gt value is any integer value the default is 20 For example the following command changes the low queue size to 50 protocol priority ethernet 2 1 low queue size 50 protocol priority ethernet 2 1 Specifying the Maximum High Queue Latency To specify the greatest delay that a high priority packet can experience and consequently how many normal priority or low priority bits can be in the transmit queue at any one time navigate to the protocol priority prompt for example box ethernet 2 1 protocol priority and enter max high queue latency lt value gt value is between 100 to 5000 ms inclusive The default is 250 ms Nortel Networks recommends accepting the default value of 250 ms For example the following command changes the maximum high queue latency to 500 protocol priority ethernet 2 1 max high queue latency 500 314470 15 6 Rev 00 16 5 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice protocol priority ethernet 2 1 Clearing the High Water Marks When you change the queue depth by changing the value of the high queue normal queue or low queue size you can also reset
250. rk well for most configurations However you can customize protocol prioritization to maximize its impact on your network For information about when you might want to customize protocol prioritization see Chapter 2 in Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization To customize protocol prioritization parameters use the following procedures Procedure Page Displaying Protocol Priority Parameter Values 16 2 Enabling or Disabling Protocol Priority 16 4 Specifying the High Queue Size 16 4 Specifying the Normal Queue Size 16 5 Specifying the Low Queue Size 16 5 Specifying the Maximum High Queue Latency 16 5 Clearing the High Water Marks 16 6 Selecting the Prioritization Algorithm Type 16 6 Selecting the High Queue Percentage Bandwidth 16 7 Selecting the Normal Queue Percentage Bandwidth 16 7 314470 15 6 Rev 00 16 3 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Procedure Page Selecting the Low Queue Percentage Bandwidth 16 8 Controlling the Dequeuing of Packets 16 8 Enabling or Disabling Protocol Priority When you configure protocol priority on a circuit it is enabled by default To disable protocol priority navigate to the protocol priority prompt for example box ethernet 2 1 protocol priority and enter state disabled If you set this parameter to disabled all outbound traffic filters will be disabled on this in
251. rotocols gt IP gt DSQMS gt Interface gt Queues Default 0 Options 0 through 2147483647 Function Specifies the maximum number of packets that this queue can hold The value 0 indicates that this queue will hold a maximum number that is less than or equal to 256 the software calculates this value based on the router you are configuring and the number of queues configured Note If this queue will be used by shaped frame relay PVCs and the value of this parameter is set to 0 the packet limit for the queue defaults to 20 Instructions To set a maximum number of packets for this queue to hold enter a value from 1 through 256 Or accept the default value 0 to set the maximum packet limit to a software determined value that is less than or equal to 256 Note If this queue will be used by shaped frame relay PVCs and the value of this parameter is set to 0 the packet limit for the queue defaults to 20 MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 16 2 1 10 Parameter Byte Limit Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt DSQMS gt Interface gt Queues Default 0 Options 0 through 2147483647 Function Specifies the maximum number of bytes that this queue can hold The value 0 indicates that this queue is limited only by global memory Instructions To set a maximum number of bytes for this queue to hold enter a value greater than 0 To set no limit on the number of bytes accept the default value 0 MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5
252. router generated packets are mapped to DSQMS queues based on the mapping scheme shown in Table 6 3 As the table indicates critical and network control traffic is automatically directed to the two internal queues that have strict priority scheduling You cannot change the mappings for the two internal queues However you can override the default mappings of the user configurable queues For information about changing the mappings of user configurable queues see Configuring Differentiated Services Note You should use BayRS traffic filters on untrusted ingress interfaces to limit the critical and network control traffic entering the router These traffic filters minimize congestion in the high priority internal queues Table 6 3 Mapping of DSQMS Queues and DSCP Total Number of Number of DSQMS Queues DSQMS DSQMS Queues excluding the FR Queue Differentiated Services Code Configured Shaped Queue Number Point DSCP 1 3 INTQ1 CS7 INTQ2 CS6 Q1 CS5 EF AFxx CS1 4 DF CS0 2 4 INTQ1 CS7 INTQ2 CS6 Q1 CS5 EF Q2 AFxx CS1 4 DF CS0 4 6 INTQ1 CS7 INTQ2 CS6 Q1 CS5 EF Q2 AF4x CS4 Q3 AF3x CS3 Q4 AF2x CS2 AF1x CS1 DF CS0 continued 6 8 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Differentiated Services Table 6 3 Mapping of DSQMS Queues and DSCP continued Total Number of Number of DSQMS Queues DSQMS DSQMS Queues excluding the FR Queue Differentiated Services Code Confi
253. rs A 14 DSQMS Interface Parameters A 16 DSQMS Queue Parameters A 19 DSQMS Queue Classifier Parameters A 25 Frame Relay PVC Parameters A 27 Frame Relay Service Record Parameter A 31 Frame Relay SVC Parameters A 32 GRE Remote Connection Parameters A 33 IGMP Global Parameters A 35 IGMP Interface Parameters A 39 IGMP Translation Table Parameters A 45 IGMP Static Forwarding Policy Parameters A 46 IP_ Global Parameters A 47 IP Interface Parameter A 50 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 1 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Topic Page NAT Global Parameter A 50 OSPF Global Parameter A 51 OSPF Area Parameter A 51 OSPF RIP Announce Policy Parameter A 52 PIM Global Parameters A 53 PIM Interface Parameters A 57 PIM Static RP Parameters A 58 PPP Interface Parameters A 59 PPP Multilink Multiclass Classes Parameter A 60 PPP Line Parameter A 61 QLLC Mapping Table Configuration Parameter A 61 RADIUS Access Control Parameters A 62 RADIUS Client Parameters A 63 RIP Parameter A 65 VRRP Parameter A 65 X 25 Network Service Record Parameter A 66 You can display the same information using Site Manager online Help For each parameter this appendix provides the following information Parameter name Configuration Manager menu path Default setting Valid parameter options Parameter function Instructions for setting the parameter Management information base MIB object
254. rsion 3 so that the two implementations of PIM can work together When the translation table is configured the table translates IGMP Version 2 groups into IGMP Version 3 group source pairs The translation table is configured on a PIM domain border router only Before you enable this parameter configure the translation table choose Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Translation Table 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 13 1 16 IGMP Interface Parameters For IGMP Version 3 introduced in BayRS Version 15 6 a number of new IGMP interface parameters were added and a number of existing parameters were changed or made obsolete For this reason all IGMP interface parameters are provided in this section Use the following descriptions to set IGMP interface parameters Note The IGMP interface parameters Interface Membership Timeout and Designated Router Timeout are now obsolete and no longer appear on the IGMP Interfaces Configuration window Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Enable Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Interfaces Enable Enable Disable Indicates whether this IGMP interface record is enabled or disabled If you configured IGMP on this interface use this parameter to disable it 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 13 2 1 2 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 39 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Parameter Path Default Options Function
255. ry timeout 20 state enabled Using Site Manager To change the default value of the GRE Keepalive Retries parameter for a remote tunnel end point complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens Choose IP The IP menu opens Choose GRE The GRE Create Tunnels List window opens Click on Remote Conn The GRE Remote Connections List window opens Select the remote tunnel end point for which you want to set the keepalive retries value from the list Set the Keepalive Retries parameter Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 33 Click on Apply The GRE keepalive retries value is set for the selected tunnel end point 10 6 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Chapter 11 Configuring IP ARP RARP RIP and OSPF Services Version 15 3 0 0 The following section is new to Chapter 1 IP Concepts Terminology and Features in Configuring IP ARP RARP RIP and OSPF Services RFC 826 Support BayRS now supports RFC 826 An Ethernet Address Resolution Protocol According to RFC 826 when a router interface receives an ARP request or reply it checks the source IP address to make sure that it is valid and the router s translation table for the destination IP and MAC address pair If the saved MAC address in the table is di
256. s gt Edit IP gt IKE Default None Options Up to 24 bytes Function Used as a cryptographic key for creating IKE SAs between routers IKE is then used to create automated SAs for data packets Instructions Enter a hexadecimal number up to 24 bytes Enter the prefix Ox before the MIB Object ID digits Configure the same preshared key on the destination router 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 27 1 1 9 314470 15 6 Rev 00 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice BGP 3 Specific Announce Policy Parameter You use the following parameter to specify one or more BGP peers Parameter Outbound Peers Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt Policy Filters gt BGP 3 gt Announce Policies Default An empty list Options A list of IP numbers Function Specifies the BGP router ID of the peer To verify the router ID of the BGP peer on the peer router check the configured value for the Site Manager BGP Global parameter BGP Identifier or the BCC BGP parameter router id This policy applies to BGP advertisements authored by a router on this list and applies only to BGP sourced routes when BGP is included as a route source Instructions Specify one or more IP addresses Configure an empty list to indicate that this policy applies to BGP advertisements being sent to any peer MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 6 8 1 23 A 12 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters BGP 4 Specific Announce Policy Par
257. s FRF 9 compression on this PVC You must disable the WCP Enable parameter before you can enable FRF 9 compression Instructions To enable FRF 9 compression select Enable To disable FRF 9 compression MIB Object ID select Disable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 2 1 64 Parameter FRF 9 Min Compress Size Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt Frame Relay gt Services gt PVCs Default 0 Options Any integer Function Specifies the minimum size in bytes of an outgoing frame in order for it to be compressed using FRF 9 compression Because small frames are less likely to experience a reduction in byte count from compression you can use this parameter to skip compression of frames smaller than the value you specify This test of the compression threshold is performed for each outgoing buffer Instructions To set a minimum size threshold for frames to be compressed using FRE 9 MIB Object ID compression specify an integer Otherwise accept the default value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 2 1 65 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 29 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice You use the following parameters to configure FRF 12 fragmentation on a frame relay PVC Parameter FRF 12 Fragmentation Enable Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt Frame Relay gt Services gt PVCs Default Disable Options Disable Enable Function Enables or disables FRF 12 fragmentation of data packets on the PVC To accomplish interleaving
258. s for dial up lines applies only to incoming calls E PPP Line Lists x h J Figure 14 3 Site Manager PPP Line Lists Window 314470 15 6 Rev 00 14 7 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice To enable or disable multilink multiclass on dial up lines using Site Manager perform the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 choose Protocols In the Configuration Manager window Choose PPP The Protocols menu opens 3 Choose Interfaces The PPP Interface List window opens 4 Click on the interface on which you want to enable disable multilink multiclass parameter Click on Help or see the 8 Click on Apply 5 Click on Lines The PPP Line Lists window opens for the selected interface 6 Click on the line on which you want to enable disable multilink multiclass 7 Set the Multilink Multiclass for Dialup parameter description on A 61 Repeat steps 6 through 8 for each line on which you want to enable disable multilink multiclass 10 Click on Done You return to the PPP Interface List window 11 Click on Done again window You return to the Configuration Manager 14 8 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring PPP Services Version 15 6 0 0 The following section supplements and amends information in Chapters 2 and 3 of Configuring PPP Services 308639 14 00 Rev 00 PPP Link Quality Monit
259. sable the VRRP ping feature Parameter VRRP Address Ping Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt Global Protocols gt IP gt VRRP Default Disable Options Enable Disable Function Allows you to ping a master virtual router that is not the owner of the virtual router IP address This feature is useful for checking network connectivity Instructions Set to Enable to allow the router to ping a master virtual router that is not the MIB Object ID owner of the virtual router IP address Accept the default Disable to prevent that master virtual router from responding to a ping When this feature is disabled VRRP is in full compliance with RFC 2338 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 25 1 1 15 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 65 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice X 25 Network Service Record Parameter You use the following parameter to enable or disable the No Calling Address feature Parameter No Calling Address Path Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Choose an Interface gt Edit gt X25 Protocol gt Service Default Off Options On Off Function Allows the router to accept incoming X 25 calls for QLLC service from devices that do not have an X 121 calling address Only one X 25 connection can be supported at any given time Instructions Set this parameter to On to allow the router to accept incoming X 25 calls for QLLC service from devices that do not have an X 121 calling address MIB Objec
260. scrambling off 314470 15 6 Rev 00 3 11 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice For example the following command turns cell scrambling off for ATM connector 1 in slot 11 atm 11 1 ds3e3 scrambling off atm 11 1 Version 15 6 0 0 The following section contains amendments to Chapter 5 Customizing PVC Service Records and PVCs and Chapter 7 Customizing Classical IP Service Records in Configuring ATM Services part number 308612 15 1 Rev 00 Virtual Circuit Monitoring with the ifSpeed MIB Attribute A number of network management and performance management applications use the ifSpeed MIB attribute to calculate traffic utilization on virtual circuits and to generate alarms when traffic utilization exceeds certain thresholds Before Version 15 6 BayRS automatically set the ifSpeed MIB attribute to the line speed of the interface not to the speed of the ATM virtual circuits on that interface BayRS Version 15 6 supports a new parameter called Optional Line Speed for ATM service records the value that you set for this parameter is reported by the ifSpeed MIB variable In this way network management applications can use SNMP to obtain a user configured value for the ifSpeed variable for a virtual circuit and generate alarms as appropriate Note This new parameter applies to the service record only regardless of how many virtual circuits are configured under that service record By default the if
261. shipping container within 30 days of purchase to obtain a credit for the full purchase price Software is owned or licensed by Nortel Networks its parent or one of its subsidiaries or affiliates and is copyrighted and licensed not sold Software consists of machine readable instructions its components data audio visual content such as images text recordings or pictures and related licensed materials including all whole or partial copies Nortel Networks grants you a license to use the Software only in the country where you acquired the Software You obtain no rights other than those granted to you under this License Agreement You are responsible for the selection of the Software and for the installation of use of and results obtained from the Software 1 Licensed Use of Software Nortel Networks grants Customer a nonexclusive license to use a copy of the Software on only one machine at any one time or to the extent of the activation or authorized usage level whichever is applicable To the extent Software is furnished for use with designated hardware or Customer furnished equipment CFE Customer is granted a nonexclusive license to use Software only on such hardware or CFE as applicable Software contains trade secrets and Customer agrees to treat Software as confidential information using the same care and discretion Customer uses with its own similar information that it does not wish to disclose publish or disseminate Custom
262. shold value Accept the default value 20 percent or reset the minimum threshold to a value from 0 through 100 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 16 4 1 6 Max Threshold Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt DSQMS gt RED 80 1 through 100 Indicates the queue size as a percentage above which all packets are dropped by RED When the maximum threshold value is reached the router drops all packets until the average queue size falls below the maximum threshold value Accept the default value 80 percent or reset the maximum threshold to a value from 1 through 100 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 16 4 1 7 314470 15 6 Rev 00 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice DSQMS Interface Parameters The Edit DSQMS Parameters window Figure A 2 contains DSQMS parameters for the physical interface These parameters let you enable DSQMS on the interface set the debug level and configure FRF 12 interleaving parameters E Edit Dsqms Parameters E x Done Dsqms 105101 apply Restart Queues Values Help 4 gt ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE Figure A 2 Edit DSQMS Parameters Window Parameter Enable Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt DSQMS gt Interface Default Enable Options Enable Disable Function Disables and reenables DSQMS on the interface Instructions To disable DSQMS on the interface select Disabled To reenable DSQMS on the interface select Enabled MIB Object ID 1 3 6
263. software documentation are governed by Nortel Networks standard commercial license in accordance with U S Federal Regulations at 48 C F R Sections 12 212 for non DoD entities and 48 C F R 227 7202 for DoD entities Customer may terminate the license at any time Nortel Networks may terminate the license if Customer fails to comply with the terms and conditions of this license In either event upon termination Customer must either return the Software to Nortel Networks or certify its destruction Customer is responsible for payment of any taxes including personal property taxes resulting from Customer s use of the Software Customer agrees to comply with all applicable laws including all applicable export and import laws and regulations Neither party may bring an action regardless of form more than two years after the cause of the action arose The terms and conditions of this License Agreement form the complete and exclusive agreement between Customer and Nortel Networks This License Agreement is governed by the laws of the country in which Customer acquires the Software If the Software is acquired in the United States then this License Agreement is governed by the laws of the state of New York 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Contents Preface fees em 2 0 BOUIN ener ene ee een eerer R Xvi WERE CONS deoin E EAR E RE E T sr KV PIONS E E A E OA AONO A S E A E A A A EE xviii Hard Copy Technical Manuals cccscessseees
264. st disable the WCP Enable parameter before you can enable FRF 9 compression To enable FRF 9 compression select Enable To disable FRF 9 compression select Disable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 10 1 35 FRE 9 Min Compress Size Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt Frame Relay gt Services gt SVCs 0 Any integer Specifies the minimum size in bytes of an outgoing frame in order for it to be compressed using FRF 9 compression Because small frames are less likely to experience a reduction in byte count from compression you can use this parameter to skip compression of frames smaller than the value you specify This test of the compression threshold is performed for each outgoing buffer To set a minimum size threshold for frames to be compressed using FRF 9 compression specify an integer Otherwise accept the default value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 10 1 36 A 32 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters GRE Remote Connection Parameters You use the following parameter to enable and disable the transmission of GRE keepalive messages from a GRE tunnel s local endpoint to its remote endpoint Parameter Keepalive Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt GRE gt Remote Conn Default Disabled Options Enabled Disabled Function Enables and disables the transmission of GRE keepalive messages between a GRE tunnel s local endpoint and one of its configured remote tunnel endpoints Instructions Set to enabl
265. st window opens 4 Select the appropriate service record and click on PVCs The FR PVC List for Service window opens 5 Click on a PVC that you want to configure traffic shaping on 6 Set the following parameters e Committed Burst e Excess Burst e Throughput e Bw Threshold Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 27 7 Click on Done You return to the Frame Relay Service List window 8 Click on Done You return to the Frame Relay Circuit Definition window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 314470 15 6 Rev 00 9 25 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Configuring FRF 12 Fragmentation on the Frame Relay PVCs To configure FRF 12 fragmentation on the PVCs complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on a port configured for frame relay The Edit Connector window opens Click on Edit Circuit The Frame Relay Circuit Definition window opens Click on Services The Frame Relay Service List window opens Select the appropriate service record and click on PVCs Click on a PVC that you want to configure FRF 12 fragmentation on The FR PVC List for Service window opens Set the following parameters e FRF 12 Fragmentation Enable e FRF 12 Fragmentation Trigger Size Clic
266. static RP based first on highest priority then on the highest hash value Specify the priority for this static RP 99999 666 7 PPP Interface Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Use the following parameters to configure the PPP interface parameters associated with the RFC 2686 Multi Class Extension to Multi Link PPP feature for BayRS For information on configuring other PPP interface parameters see Configuring PPP Services Multilink MultiClass Enable Protocols gt PPP gt Interfaces Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables Multilink Multiclass RFC 2686 for this interface This parameter is active only for Multilink To start Multilink Multiclass on the selected interface set this parameter to Enable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 82 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 59 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Maximum Number of Classes Protocols gt PPP gt Interfaces 6 6 Specifies the maximum number of classes that may be received or transmitted This parameter is active only for Multilink Multiclass This parameter is preset to 6 It is displayed for reference only and cannot be changed 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 83 PPP Multilink Multiclass Classes Parameter Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID
267. t Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Interfaces No Yes No Specifies whether IGMP queries are suppressed on this interface In the Nortel Networks multicast implementation configuring IGMP on an interface means two things 1 the interface is used for forwarding multicast traffic and 2 IGMP is running on the interface Therefore on some interfaces for example point to point or nonbroadcast even though there is no need to run the IGMP protocol IGMP must still be configured On such interfaces you can disable the sending of IGMP queries 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 13 2 1 25 Static Forward Cache Lifetime Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Interfaces 216 80 to 7200 seconds If the IGMP static forwarding policy is set to Static to Dynamic static inbound and multicast protocol outbound specifies the number of seconds that the Multicast Table Manager cache entries will be alive for even if traffic is not present Set this value based on the multicast protocol that is configured on the outbound interface A typical value for PIM is 210 seconds 3 1 2 minutes for DVMRP 7200 seconds 2 hours and for MOSPF 600 seconds 10 minutes 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 13 2 1 28 A 42 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object
268. t ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 4 2 1 55 A 66 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Numbers 802 1Q tagged circuits adding to an existing interface 8 5 adding to an unconfigured interface 8 4 displaying statistics for 8 11 802 1Q tagging implementation considerations 8 2 8 7 router processing of tagged frames 8 2 A acronyms xviii Adjacent Host parameter description A 3 areas OSPF NSSA configuring 11 9 ATM cell scrambling 3 11 ATM circuit creating for a T3 or E3 connector on the Passport 5430 using Site Manager 3 6 using the BCC 3 1 ATM line parameter descriptions A 3 ATM port parameter descriptions A 7 ATM service record parameter description A 10 Automated Security Association IKE parameter descriptions A 11 BayRS online library CD 1 1 BCC Bay Command Console inactivity timer 24 4 source command 24 1 BCC show commands show dsqms queues stats 6 10 show frame relay stats 9 7 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Index show gre 20 1 show hardware 24 2 show hifn ipcomp 5 6 show taglq circuits 8 11 BGP implementation notes 12 1 BGP 3 Announce Policy parameter descriptions A 12 BGP 4 Announce Policy parameter descriptions A 13 boot and diagnostic PROMs upgrading 21 1 boot PROMs upgrading and verifying 21 5 booting a router to upgrade an existing configuration file 21 8 Bootstrap Border parameter PIM interface A 57 bootstrap border router configuring for PIM SM 13 1 Bw Threshold parameter fram
269. t length is greater than the value of the packet length parameter Valid values are high low or normal less_than_or_equal_queue_value specifies which queue a packet is placed in if its packet length is less than or equal to the value of the packet length parameter Valid values are high low or normal packet_length_value defines a packet length measurement to which each packet is compared An action is imposed on every packet depending on whether it is less than equal to or greater than the value you set for this parameter This action depends on the values of the less than or equal queue and the greater than queue parameters Enter a packet length value in bytes 0 through 4608 The default is 256 Example This example specifies that packets with lengths greater than 156 bytes are placed in the normal queue and that packets with lengths less than or equal to 156 bytes are placed in the high queue actions ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 action length actions ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 prioritization length prioritization length ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 greater than queue normal prioritization length ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 less than or equal queue high prioritization length ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 packet length 156 16 22 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization Note If you attempt to delete an IP traffic filte
270. t specification The first four octets specify the first IP address of the SSM range the second four octets specify the network mask for the SSM range For example enter IP address 233 0 0 0 and network mask 255 0 0 0 Enter an exact encoding of 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 to disable SSM ranges 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 13 1 15 Relay Forwarding Timeout Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Global 60 seconds 0 to 65 535 Sets the lifetime in seconds of IGMP Relay Multicast Table Manager forwarding entries Set the timer as required by your configuration 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 13 1 11 Relay Upstream Forwarding Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Global Primary Primary Backup Both Specifies whether multicast data is forwarded from the IGMP Relay device onto the primary upstream interface the backup interface or both when both interfaces are active Select an option as required by your configuration 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 13 1 12 A 38 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Translation Enable Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Global Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables the use of the PIM SM PIM SSM translation table The translation table is a migration tool to translate PIM SM IGMP Version 2 information into PIM SSM IGMP Ve
271. t to add unique identifiers to ICMP echo requests Set to Enable if you want to add unique identifiers to ICMP echo requests 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 1 31 You use the following parameter to specify the maximum number of equal cost multipath support on the router IP OSPF Maximum Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt Global 1 1to5 Specifies the maximum number of equal cost paths allowed for a network installed by OSPF Use the IP global Multipath Method parameter to enable multipath costs and specify the method that IP uses to choose the next hop for a datagram 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 1 21 A 48 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters You use the following parameter to set the IP global parameter Multiple Nexthop Calculation Method which has been revised to support PIM SSM Parameter Multiple Nexthop Calculation Method Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt Global Default Disable Options Disable Round Robin Source Destination Hash Destination Hash Multicast Only Function Enables and disables equal cost multipath support for RIP OSPF and PIM SSM and specifies the method that IP uses to choose the next hop when more than one is available Set this parameter as required You can select any method to enable ECMP support for PIM SSM multicast ECMP always uses the source destination hash method for PIM SSM forwarding table entries Round Robin IP forwards each p
272. t you want to accept or drop Note If you filter on a TCP or UDP source or destination the software automatically changes the value to the protocol number associated with TCP or UDP If you specify a protocol other than TCP or UDP the software prevents you from filtering on the TCP or UDP source or destination Otherwise the offset associated with one of the parameters in the non UDP TCP packet could coincidentally match the filter and the software would perform the filter s action To filter traffic using the protocol field navigate to the match ip ip prompt for example box serial 3 1 protocol priority ip outbound filter lt filter_name gt match ip ip and enter the following command pri ip ip protocol lt ist_of_protocols gt list_of_protocols can include any number of protocol identifiers It can also specify ranges of protocol identifiers Table 16 4 lists some common protocol ID codes for IP traffic Table 16 4 Common Protocol IDs for IP Traffic Protocol ID Code Decimal ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol 1 IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol 2 TCP Transmission Control Protocol 6 EGP Exterior Gateway Protocol 8 IGP Interior Gateway Protocol 9 UDP User Datagram Protocol 17 RSVP Resource Reservation Protocol 46 GRE Generic Routing Encapsulation 47 NHRP Next Hop Resolution Protocol 54 OSPF Open Shortest Path First 89 314470 15 6 Rev 00 1
273. tate disabled vlan engineering 2 info global vlan id 2 protocol type 0x8100 state disabled virtual port type tagged vlan name engineering 8 10 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Ethernet FDDI and Token Ring Services vlan engineering 2 state enabled vlan engineering 2 info global vlan id 2 protocol type 0x8100 state enabled virtual port type tagged vlan name engineering vlan engineering 2 Deleting a Tagged Circuit To delete a tagged circuit from an Ethernet interface go to the VLAN prompt for example box eth 2 1 vlan engineering 2 and enter delete For example the following commands delete the VLAN engineering from Ethernet interface 2 1 box ethernet 2 1 ethernet 2 1 vlan engineering 2 vlan engineering 2 delete ethernet 2 1 Displaying Information about Tagged Circuits The BCC command show tag1q circuits displays information about the tagged circuits on the router This command allows for the following command filters and arguments disabled Displays information about disabled tagged circuits only enabled Displays information about enabled tagged circuits only circuit lt circuit_no gt Displays information about the specified tagged circuit only 314470 15 6 Rev 00 8 11 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice The following example displays information about all tagged circuits configured on the router box show tag1q circuits show taglq circuits Nov 05 2004
274. terface Setting this parameter to disabled is useful if you want to temporarily disable all outbound traffic filters rather than delete them To re enable protocol priority navigate to the protocol priority prompt for example box ethernet 2 1 protocol priority and enter state enabled For example the following command enables protocol priority on the selected circuit protocol priority ethernet 2 1 state enabled protocol priority ethernet 2 1 Specifying the High Queue Size To specify the maximum number of packets in the High queue at any one time regardless of packet size navigate to the protocol priority prompt for example box ethernet 2 1 protocol priority and enter high queue size lt va lue gt value is any integer value the default is 20 For example the following command changes the high queue size to 50 protocol priority ethernet 2 1 high queue size 50 protocol priority ethernet 2 1 16 4 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization Specifying the Normal Queue Size To specify the maximum number of packets in the Normal queue at any one time regardless of packet size navigate to the protocol priority prompt for example box ethernet 2 1 protocol priority and enter normal queue size lt value gt value is any integer value the default is 20 200 for frame relay For example the following command changes the normal queue size to 50 protocol prio
275. teroperability of BayRS FRF 12 Implementation The BayRS implementation of FRF 12 fragmentation and interleaving interoperates with the following FRF 12 implementations e Nortel Networks Passport 7000 15000 The Passport 7000 15000 support FRF 12 in the end to end DTE to DTE fragmentation format only For good voice quality using FRF 12 the Passport 7000 15000 requires more than one PVC to each destination e Cisco 3600 7000 series routers The Cisco implementation must use end to end fragmentation 9 16 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Frame Relay Services FRE 5 frame relay ATM network interworking as defined in Section 7 and Appendix A of the FRF 12 specification The fragment size must be set to an even multiple of the underlying ATM cell payload size in order to optimize the performance at the ATM layer Implementation of FRF 12 Fragmentation and Interleaving on BayRS BayRS implements FRF 12 fragmentation and interleaving as follows FRF 12 is supported for PVCs only and is configurable on a per PVC basis The fragment size is configurable for each FRE 12 PVC You can configure the fragment size of data packets on each PVC the default fragment size is 80 bytes Packets smaller than the configured fragment size are sent without fragmentation VoIP packets are not fragmented FRF 12 is not supported on dial or multiline multilink frame relay interfaces BayRS supports the end to end fragmentation format only T
276. terval parameter IGMP interface A 43 Relay Upstream Forwarding parameter IGMP global A 38 314470 15 6 Rev 00 remote tunnel end point GRE enabling and disabling keepalive messages 10 2 setting keepalive retries 10 5 setting timeout interval for keepalive messages 10 3 rendezvous point RP PIM SM configuring static 13 17 RFC 3101 Compatibility Enable parameter OSPF global A 51 RFC 3101 Forwarding Address Compatibility for OSPF NSSA 11 7 RFC 826 description 11 1 RIP Announce Policy parameter description A 52 RIP Interface parameter description A 65 RIP updates importing RIP V1 V2 or both 11 2 Robustness Variable parameter IGMP interface A 43 RP rendezvous point PIM SM configuring static 13 17 S scripts using to dynamically configure a router 22 1 show dsqms queue stats command 6 10 show frame relay stats command 9 7 show hardware command BCC 24 2 show hifn ipcomp command 5 6 show taglq circuits command 8 11 Site Manager changing SNMP trap port 2 1 upgrade prerequisites 21 3 using to configure DSQMS 6 14 SNMP configuring trap port 2 1 source command BCC 24 1 Sources parameter IGMP static forwarding policies A 47 Source Specific Multicast parameter PIM global A 53 SPARCstation system requirements 19 1 SSM address range configuring 13 12 defined 13 3 Index 5 SSM Ranges parameter IGMP global A 38 starting IGMP Version 3 13 6 PIM SSM 13 6
277. the PIM SM PIM SSM Translation Table The BayRS implementation of IGMP Version 3 and PIM SSM can operate in environments with mixed PIM SM and PIM SSM domains To eliminate the need to reconfigure hosts and routers running IGMP Version 2 the BayRS implementation of IGMP Version 3 and PIM SSM supports a translation table The translation table maps IGMP Version 2 groups to IGMP Version 3 group source pairs For each source group the table provides a static mapping of IGMP Version 2 PIM SM g join prune requests to IGMP Version 3 PIM SSM s g join prune requests The translation table is configured on a PIM domain border router Using the translation table the PIM SSM router can accept IGMP Version 2 join leave packets from IGMP Version 2 hosts if an entry is created to associate a multicast group with one or more source addresses in the table Before you enable the translation table your configuration must meet these criteria e PIM SSM must already be enabled see Starting IGMP Version 3 and PIM SSM on page 13 5 e Any source group that will be specified in the translation table must have an address in the SSM range e Ifthe border router on which the translation table will be created has a directly attached IGMP Version 2 host the connecting interface on the router must be configured as an IGMP Version 2 interface To enable the translation table perform these steps on the PIM domain border router 1 Create the tra
278. the high water mark by changing the value of this parameter When you change the value of this parameter you reset the high water mark for all three queues to zero To clear the existing high water marks navigate to the protocol priority prompt for example box ethernet 2 1 protocol priority and enter high water packets clear lt value gt value is any integer value the default is 0 For example the following command clears the existing high water marks for the priority queues protocol priority ethernet 2 1 high water packets clear 1 protocol priority ethernet 2 1 Selecting the Prioritization Algorithm Type To select the dequeuing algorithm that protocol prioritization uses to drain priority queues and transmit traffic navigate to the protocol priority prompt for example box ethernet 2 1 protocol priority and enter prioritization algorithm type bandwidth allocation strict If you select strict queueing the router always transmits traffic in the High queue before transmitting traffic in the other queues If you accept the default bandwidth allocation queueing the router transmits traffic in a queue until the utilization percentage for that queue is reached then the router transmits traffic in the next lower priority queue You configure the percentages for bandwidth allocation by setting the high queue normal queue and low queue percentage bandwidth parameters For example the following command changes th
279. this IGMP membership report Set this parameter as required 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 13 1 7 Forward Cache Limit Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Global 512 64 to 65 535 Specifies the maximum number of MTM forwarding cache entries Set this parameter as required 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 13 1 8 Nonlocal Reports Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Global Ignore Ignore Accept Controls whether IGMP accepts or ignores leave and join messages from a nonlocal network Set the parameter as required by your configuration 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 13 1 9 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 37 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID SSM Ranges Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt IGMP IGMP Relay gt Global 232 0 0 0 232 255 255 255 Non overlapping multicast address ranges Specifies one or more multicast group address ranges for SSM If you configure more than one SSM range the ranges cannot overlap IGMP Version 3 packets are valid only if the multicast destination address is within a configured SSM range Click in the parameter field and then click on the List button For each range enter an 8 octe
280. to Chapter 12 Installing Site Manager on an HP 9000 Workstation in Quick Starting Routers 314470 15 6 Rev 00 19 1 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice HP 9000 Workstation System Requirements To run Site Manager your HP 9000 workstation must meet the following hardware and software requirements e Supported workstations HP 9000 Series 700 and 800 e Supported operating systems HP UX 10 20 BayRS Version 15 3 0 0 up to but not including 15 5 0 0 and HP UX 11 00 including the complete services network services directory e Window environment CDE 1 0 1 e 32 MB of RAM e 145 MB of free disk space e 32 MB of swap space 64 MB recommended e Network adapter appropriate for your network e CD ROM drive 19 2 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Chapter 20 Reference for BCC IP show Commands Version 15 5 0 0 The following information supplements the information provided in Chapter 4 GRE show Commands of the Reference for BCC IP show Commands Modified Output for the GRE Keepalive Mechanism The output for the following BCC show commands was modified to support the GRE keepalive feature introduced in Version 15 5 0 0 e show gre logical ip tunnels e show gre logical ipx tunnels e show gre physical tunnels For information about the modified output to these BCC show commands see the following sections 314470 15 6 Rev 00 20 1 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice show gre logical ip
281. to Disable WCP and FRF 9 cannot operate on one SVC WCP is enabled by default Set the FRF 9 Enable parameter to Enable Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 32 If necessary set the FRF 9 Min Compress Size parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 32 10 Click on Done You return to the Frame Relay Service List window 11 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 9 14 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Frame Relay Services Configuring FRF 12 Fragmentation and Interleaving With Version 15 6 0 0 BayRS implements the Frame Relay Fragmentation Implementation Agreement FRF 12 supporting the end to end fragmentation format only Overview of FRF 12 Fragmentation and Interleaving FRF 12 defines frame relay extensions that allow a sender to fragment the packets within a VC With FRF 12 transmitting frame relay DTEs and DCEs fragment long frames into a sequence of shorter frames the receiving peer DTE or DCE reassembles the fragments into the original frame FRF 12 defines only packet fragmentation and reassembly it does not define an interleaving scheme for the fragments However FRF 12 fragmentation allows high priority packets of one VC to be sent interleaved between fragments of lower priority packets of the same or other VCs The BayRS implementation of FRF 12 provides a Layer 2 fragmentation and interleaving soluti
282. ttp www ietf org internet drafts draft ietf pim sm v2 new 11 txt Source Specific Multicast for IP Internet Draft H Holbrook B Cain 9 2004 http www ietf org internet drafts draft ietf ssm arch 06 txt 13 4 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring IP Multicasting and Multimedia Services Starting IGMP Version 3 and PIM SSM This section explains how to start IGMP Version 3 and PIM SSM on a router If IGMP and PIM are not yet configured on the router go to the next section Adding IGMP Version 3 and PIM SSM to the Router on page 13 5 e IfIGMP and PIM are already configured on the router and you want to support IGMP Version 3 and PIM SSM go to Editing IGMP and PIM Parameters for PIM SSM on page 13 7 Note Every router interface on the same network should be configured with the same version of IGMP Adding IGMP Version 3 and PIM SSM to the Router This section describes how to create a basic PIM SSM and IGMP Version 3 configuration by specifying values for required parameters only and accepting default values for all other parameters IGMP is required for all types of multicasting IGMP Version 3 is required for PIM SSM If you want the router to receive and forward multicast packets that is packets with destination addresses from 224 0 1 0 through 239 255 255 255 IGMP must be running on the slot and circuit even if the circuit is a point to point circuit that will not be involved in IG
283. tunnels The show gre logical ip tunnels command displays information about the logical IP connections configured on a GRE tunnel This command allows for the following command filters and arguments disabled Displays information about disabled tunnels only enabled Displays information about enabled tunnels only address lt address gt Displays information for tunnels configured with the specified IP address only name lt name gt Displays information for tunnels configured with the specified tunnel name only When you specify this filter it displays both the filter flag and value that is long notation lt name gt Displays information for tunnels configured with the specified tunnel name only When you specify this filter it displays a value only that is short notation The output includes the following information Tunnel Name Name assigned to the GRE tunnel Local Address IP address of the host interface on the local end of the GRE tunnel connection Local State State of the local host interface enabled or disabled Remote Endpoint Name Name assigned to the host interface on the remote end of the GRE tunnel connection Remote Endpoint Address IP address assigned to the host interface on the remote end of the GRE tunnel connection Keepalive Enabled If enabled indicates that keepalives will be sent to the remote endpoint and keepalives received from that endpoint will be acted upon enabled or disabled
284. ueue at line rate parameter may cause packet loss in both priority and weighted queues in certain configurations when higher traffic levels are seen in these queues e If you implement RED for queue management instead of tail drop that is you set the queue parameter drop type to red and you associate the queue classifier with a RED function the probability of dropping packets may adversely affect the latency requirements of some applications Adjust the following parameters to achieve the required latency levels for the queue RED parameters min threshold and max threshold see Modifying RED Parameters on page 3 1 for instructions Queue parameters average queue gain and idle queue loss rate see Modifying a DSQMS Queue in Configuring Differentiated Services for instructions Version 15 4 0 0 The following section is an amendment to Chapter 2 Starting Differentiated Services in Configuring Differentiated Services Implementation Notes The following guidelines can help you successfully configure DSQMS on your router e You can configure DSQMS on these interfaces only Ethernet HSSI MCT1 MCE1 T1 FT1 E1 FE1 and synchronous Caution If you configure DSQMS on an Ethernet interface that is connected to an interface on a device that uses MAC addresses with leading zeros 4 bytes or more packets may be corrupted because DSQMS interprets the zeros as baggage and removes this baggage from the
285. un Site Manager Version 15 x your PC IBM workstation SPARCstation or HP 9000 must meet the hardware and software requirements listed in Table 21 1 Table 21 1 Site Manager System Requirements Platform Hardware and Software Requirements PC 486 PC Pentium recommended Microsoft Windows 98 or 2000 32 bit or Windows NT Version 4 0 32 bit 16 MB of RAM minimum 90 MB of free disk space Microsoft TCP IP for Windows 98 or 2000 and compatible network adapter and driver CD ROM drive VGA monitor SuperVGA monitor recommended SPARCstation Supported workstations SPARCstation 10 20 and UltraSPARC Supported operating system Solaris 2 7 and 2 8 Window environments CDE 1 0 1 and OpenWindows 3 5 32 MB of RAM 64 MB recommended 145 MB of disk space 32 MB of swap space Network adapter appropriate for your network CD ROM drive 314470 15 6 Rev 00 21 3 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Table 21 1 Site Manager System Requirements continued Platform Hardware and Software Requirements IBM workstation Supported workstations RS 6000 340 370 and PowerPC Supported operating system IBM AIX Version 4 3 Window environments CDE 1 0 1 and AIX Motif 1 2 32 MB of RAM 64 MB recommended 140 MB of disk space 32 MB of swap space 64 MB recommended use 96 MB of swap space with the NetView for AIX application Network adapter appropriate for yo
286. ur network CD ROM drive HP 9000 Supported workstations HP 9000 Series 700 and 800 Supported operating system HP UX 10 20 BayRS Version 15 3 0 0 up to but not including 15 5 0 0 and HP UX 11 00 including the complete network services directory Window environment CDE 1 0 1 32 MB of RAM 145 MB of free disk space 32 MB of swap space 64 MB recommended Network adapter appropriate for your network CD ROM drive Version 15 4 0 0 The following sections replace the existing sections in Chapter 4 and Chapter 5 respectively Upgrading and Verifying PROMs When you upgrade PROMs the system erases the existing PROM image and copies the contents of the newer PROM image file to the PROM To verify the PROM the system compares the contents of the new image file to the actual contents of the PROM See Table A 1 on page A 2 of Upgrading Routers to BayRS Version 15 x for Version 15 0 boot and diagnostic PROM file names and associated revision numbers for all router platforms Note Before you upgrade any router software make sure that you save a copy of the original configuration file and boot image as a safeguard in case you encounter problems after upgrading 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Upgrading Routers to BayRS Version 15 x You use the prom command from the Technician Interface to upgrade and verify the software on the diagnostic or boot PROM This command is restricted to the Manager access level To u
287. uration file and reboot the router BCC show Command Enhancement To support this QoS enhancement the output of the BCC show frame relay stats command provides DSQMS statistics at the frame relay PVC level The following information supplements Appendix C Monitoring Frame Relay Using the BCC show Command in Configuring Frame Relay Services show frame relay stats shaping dsqms queues Displays outbound traffic statistics for traffic shaped PVCs at the frame relay level when DSQMS is configured at the interface This command supports the following subcommand options circuit lt circuit gt Displays information about the PVCs configured on the specified circuit only dici lt dici gt Displays information about PVCs with the specified DLCI only 314470 15 6 Rev 00 9 7 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Following is an example of the output from a single PVC configuration with two queues bec gt show frame relay stats shaping dsqms queues show frame relay stats shaping dsqms queues Apr 23 2005 08 16 52 GMT Pkt Byte Xmit Xmit Dropped Dropped Cet DLCI Id Type Count Count Pkts Bytes Pkts Bytes N C indicates Not Configured S12 100 IntQl1 0 0 0 0 0 0 S12 100 IntQ2 0 0 0 0 0 0 S12 100 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 S12 100 2 0 0 43 2010 0 0 S12 100 3 N C 0 0 0 0 0 0 S12 100 4 N C 0 0 0 0 0 0 S12 100 5 N C 0 0 0 0 0 0 S12 100 6 N C 0 0 0 0 0 0 S12 100 7 N C 0 0 0 0 0 0 S12 100 8 N C 0 0 0 0
288. urce parameter appears for this module The clk signal source parameter cannot be modified 3 10 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring ATM Services Version 15 5 0 0 The following sections contain amendments to Chapter 3 Customizing an ATM Interface in Configuring ATM Services Turning DS 3 and E3 Cell Scrambling On and Off Beginning with BayRS Version 15 5 0 0 the BCC parameter used to turn ATM cell scrambling on and off for DS 3 and E3 interfaces has a new more specific name To eliminate confusion the scrambling parameter is now named ds3e3 scrambling The default value off for the ds3e3 scrambling parameter ATM cell scrambling feature remains the same The procedure for using Site Manager to configure ATM cell scrambling on DS 3 and E3 interfaces has not changed Note ATM cell scrambling is supported only for DS 3 and E3 interfaces Attempts to configure the ds3e3 scrambling parameter on other interfaces for example OC 3 interfaces generates the following error message Scrambling can be modified only for DS3 E3 Interface Using the BCC To turn on cell scrambling for a DS 3 or E3 interface navigate to the ATM prompt for example box atm 11 1 and enter ds3e3 scrambling on For example the following command turns on cell scrambling for ATM connector 1 in slot 11 atm 11 1 ds3e3 scrambling on atm 11 1 To turn cell scrambling off navigate to the ATM prompt and enter ds3e3
289. value of 192 at offset 96 from the beginning of the IP header match ip ip ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 user defined reference ip wan header start offset 96 bitwidth 16 range 0192 user defined filter drop_telnet_231 start ip header 96 16 0192 back match ip ip ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 back ip outbound filter drop_telnet_231 S31 actions actions ip outbound filter drop_telnet_s31 S31 action drop 16 24 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Chapter 17 Configuring VRRP Services Version 15 3 0 0 The following section is new to Chapter 3 Customizing VRRP in Configuring VRRP Services Enabling or Disabling VRRP Ping When enabled this feature allows you to ping a master virtual router that is not the owner of the virtual IP address By default VRRP ping is disabled Using the BCC To enable VRRP ping access the virtual router for example box ip vrrp 192 41 31 21 2 vr ip address 192 41 31 22 and enter ping enable enabled To disable VRRP ping access the virtual router and enter ping enable disabled For example to enable VRRP ping enter the following command vrrp 192 41 31 21 2 ping enable enabled vrrp 192 41 31 21 2 314470 15 6 Rev 00 17 1 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Using Site Manager To enable VRRP ping complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Prot
290. variance jitter of VoIP packets over low speed links by fragmenting large data packets and interleaving higher priority voice packets with the data packet fragments Packets are prioritized based on PPP service classes that are defined in the MLPPP header A mapping has been defined between the PPP service classes and DiffServ code points DSCPs in IP headers based on Nortel Networks Service Class NNSC definitions The mapping of PPP classes to DSCP is shown in Table 14 1 314470 15 6 Rev 00 14 1 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Table 14 1 Mapping of PPP Classes to DiffServ Code Points PPP Class Number Nortel Networks Service Class DiffServ Code Point 5 Premium EF CS5 4 Critical Network CS7 CS6 3 Platinum AF4x CS4 2 Gold AF3x CS3 1 Silver Bronze AF2x CS2 AF1x CS1 0 Standard DF CSO The implementation of this feature supports six service classes using round robin weighted queues with integrated queuing and scheduling Only long sequence number format is supported If compression is enabled on the link fragmentation and interleaving happens after compression is complete For multiclass circuits this feature can be configured to operate over a single line However if multiple lines are configured in the bundle they all must have the same line speed This feature can fully interoperate with the DiffServ marking of internally generated router packets feature see
291. ve copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation advertising materials and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that such portions of the software were developed by the University of California Berkeley The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from such portions of the software without specific prior written permission ii 314470 15 6 Rev 00 SUCH PORTIONS OF THE SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE In addition the program and information contained herein are licensed only pursuant to a license agreement that contains restrictions on use and disclosure that may incorporate by reference certain limitations and notices imposed by third parties Nortel Networks Inc Software License Agreement This Software License Agreement License Agreement is between you the end user Customer and Nortel Networks Corporation and its subsidiaries and affiliates Nortel Networks PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING CAREFULLY YOU MUST ACCEPT THESE LICENSE TERMS IN ORDER TO DOWNLOAD AND OR USE THE SOFTWARE USE OF THE SOFTWARE CONSTITUTES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT If you do not accept these terms and conditions return the Software unused and in the original
292. ved queues This command allows the following command filter flag and argument circuit lt circuit_no gt Displays information about queues on the specified circuit only The output now includes the new DSQMS reserved queue types added for Version 15 5 0 0 and provides the following information Cct Name of the circuit Id Type Identification number of configured queue or type of reserved queue Pkt Count Number of packets queued Byte Count Number of octets queued Xmit Pkts Number of packets transmitted Xmit Bytes Number of octets transmitted Dropped Pkts Number of dropped packets Dropped Bytes Number of dropped octets The DSQMS reserved queue types are as follows e Internal Queue 1 IntQ1 e Internal Queue 2 IntQ2 e Frame Relay Shaped Queue FR ShQ 6 10 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Differentiated Services Interoperability of Protocol Prioritization Priority Queuing and DSQMS There is a common misconception that protocol prioritization priority queuing and DSQMS cannot co exist On the contrary these two features can be configured at the same time In fact there are situations when DSQMS is configured in which protocol prioritization also must be configured such as in the case of prioritizing the frame relay Local Management Interface LMI traffic into IntQ1 The same situation also applies when prioritizing PPP Link Quality Report LQR packets and Link Control Protocol LCP echo requests
293. ver low speed Ethernet and WAN interfaces IP payload compression is transparent to the underlying Layer 2 protocols and therefore increases compression interoperability with other IP devices in the network The BayRS implementation of IP payload compression operates between two BayRS routers and uses the STAC LZS compression algorithm Note The Hi fn LZS compression software is licensed from Hi fn Inc You must separately purchase a license for the Hi fn LZS compression software which is delivered on a separate CD by Nortel Networks You configure IP payload compression on the logical IP address associated with a GRE tunnel end point Compression or decompression is applied to the packets before they exit the GRE tunnel end point IP payload compression is supported on all BayRS routers on the following low speed interfaces OBASE T Ethernet serial T1 FT1 E1 FE1 ISDN BRI and 56 64K CSU DSU Note You can configure IP payload compression on only one 1OBASE T Ethernet interface per slot IP payload compression is not supported on 1OOBASE or 1000BASE Ethernet interfaces HSSI interfaces or ATM DS3 OC3 interfaces 5 2 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Data Compression Services How IP Payload Compression Is Accomplished IP payload compression is performed on packets that are originated by the router and on packets that pass through the router Packets that are smaller than 90 bytes are not compressed The pr
294. w opens Select the service record that has the PVC that you want to configure FRF 9 for Click on PVCs The FR PVC List for Service window opens Select the PVC that you want to configure for FRF 9 If necessary set the WCP Enable parameter to Disable WCP and FRF 9 cannot operate on one PVC WCP is enabled by default Set the FRF 9 Enable parameter to Enable Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 29 If necessary set the FRF 9 Min Compress Size parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 29 10 Click on Done You return to the Frame Relay Service List window 11 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 314470 15 6 Rev 00 9 13 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice To configure FRF 9 compression on a frame relay SVC complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols Choose Frame Relay The Protocols menu opens The Frame Relay menu opens 3 Choose Services The Frame Relay Service List window opens Select the service record that has the SVC that you want to configure FRF 9 for Click on SVCs Select the SVC that you want to configure for FRF 9 The FR SVC Options List for Service window opens If necessary set the WCP Enable parameter
295. width to queue 0 30 percent of the bandwidth to queue 1 and 30 of the bandwidth to queue 3 navigate to the dlsw protocol prioritization prompt for example box disw disw protocol prioritization and enter dlsw protocol prioritization default bandwidth 40 30 300000000 dlsw protocol prioritization Enabling and Disabling DLSw Protocol Prioritization for Configured and Unconfigured Peers When you enable DLSw protocol prioritization it takes effect using the currently configured values default or customized for the global parameters Enabling DLSw protocol prioritization for configured peers To enable DLSw protocol prioritization for configured peers navigate to the global dlsw prompt for example box dilsw and enter disw protocol prioritization protocol priority enabled For example to enable DLSw protocol prioritization for configured peers using the currently configured values for the global DLSw protocol prioritization parameters navigate to the global dlsw prompt and enter dlsw dlsw protocol prioritization protocol priority enabled dlsw protocol prioritization The default setting for protocol priority is disabled To disable DLSw protocol prioritization for configured peers after enabling it navigate to the global dlsw prompt and enter disw protocol prioritization protocol priority disabled 7 4 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring DLSw Services Enabling DLSw protocol prioritization for unconfigu
296. with IP encapsulation Version 15 5 0 0 The following section corrects an omission in the Customizing Global Source Routing Bridge Parameters section of Chapter 7 Configuring Source Routing Bridge Services Using the BCC in Configuring Bridging Services 314470 15 6 Rev 00 4 1 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Specifying the IP Network Ring ID for the Source Routing Bridge You can use the BCC to specify a ring ID for the backbone IP network to which the source routing bridge connects You must specify the same IP network ring ID for each Nortel Network s source routing bridge that connects to the network To specify the ring ID for the backbone IP network to which the source routing bridge connects navigate to the global srb prompt for example box srb and enter ip net ring id lt d_number gt id_number is a hex value from 0x0 to Oxffe The default value is 0x0 Assign the same value to all Nortel Network s source routing bridges that border the IP network cloud The IP network ring ID must be unique among any other group LAN IDs ring IDs or internal LAN IDs in the network For example the following command assigns the IP network ring ID value 0x1 to the source routing bridge srb ip net ring id 0x1 4 2 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Chapter 5 Configuring Data Compression Services Version 15 5 0 0 The following notice supplements Chapter 1 Starting Compression Services in
297. xisting configuration file save the configuration file in dynamic mode to save it directly to the router To save the existing configuration file in dynamic mode 1 In the Site Manager window choose Tools gt Configuration Manager gt Dynamic The Configuration Manager window opens Figure 21 1 displaying the real time router hardware and software configuration 21 8 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Upgrading Routers to BayRS Version 15 x cor igur ation Manager i fl SS a E Configuration Mode remote SNMP Agent 192 168 129 34 File Name config Model Backbone Link Node BLN MIB Version 8 10 Sols Used MIEZ Description Connectors 5710 Dual Token Ring 4 16Mb TOKEN2 TOKEN1 5280 Quad Sync COM2 COM3 COM4 5930 FDDI MultiMode DAS FDDI1 ES ES ES System Resource Module bE Figure 21 1 Configuration Manager Window 2 Choose File gt Save As The Save Configuration File window opens Figure 21 2 Save Configuration File Save Configuration File Enter file name Volume E 1 Figure 21 2 Save Configuration File Window 3 Enter the configuration file name config 4 Choose the correct volume by clicking in the Volume field 314470 15 6 Rev 00 21 9 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice If the volume slot location of the memory card on the router is not the volume to which you want to save this file choose another volume 5 Click on Save The File Saved wind
298. you may need to disable WCP before you can enable FRE9 compression You can disable both WCP and FRE 9 compression 9 10 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Frame Relay Services e Configure FRF 9 on low speed interfaces to optimize bandwidth utilization All BayRS routers support slow speed lines configured with FRF 9 compression but full line rate data compression on high speed interfaces cannot be supported on even the fastest processors of BayRS routers e Small frames are less likely to experience a reduction in byte count from compression You can set a threshold to instruct the router to skip compression when a frame is smaller than the byte count you specify This test of the compression threshold is performed for each outgoing buffer e Some frame relay configurations have large numbers of virtual circuits and each circuit must have separate context information so the amount of memory consumed per VC may be excessive The use of Hi fn software to perform compression makes the size of this memory area fixed at approximately 24 KB per VC e With Stac LZS compression data can expand in size byte count as a result of compression particularly if the data has already undergone a compression process JPEG files for example A frame that expands due to compression is sent as long as the outgoing frame does not exceed the MTU This behavior may result in less than optimal bandwidth utilization FRF 9 FRF 12 and Traffic Shap
299. you select are represented as bits values in the parameter field as follows 0x00000001 Bootstrap procedure 0x00000002 Hello procedure 0x00000004 Join prune send procedure 0x00000008 Registration procedure 0x00000010 Maintaining PIM route table 0x00000020 Assert procedure 0x00000040 Data forwarding tree switching 0x00000080 PIM main gate processing 0x00000100 PIM Cct gate general processing 0x00000200 PIM route change processing 0x00000400 PIM G processing 0x00000800 PIM pte oif timers 0x00001000 PIM MTM signals messages 0x00002000 PIM PIM messages 0x00004000 PIM protocol messages first data 0x00008000 Join prune received 0x00010000 PIM utilities including timers 0x00020000 PIM SSM related messages 0x00040000 PIM debug option for ip pim_fwd MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 14 1 5 314470 15 6 Rev 00 A 55 BayRS Version 15 6 0 0 Document Change Notice Parameter Trace Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt PIM gt Global Default 0 Options 0 PIM modules for which you want to log PIM trace messages Function Enables or disables the logging of PIM trace messages on the PIM router Instructions To disable logging of PIM trace messages accept the default value 0 To enable logging of these messages click on Values and select the PIM modules for which you want to log trace messages The modules that you select are rep
300. you set the queue parameter drop type to red and you associate the queue classifier with a RED function the probability of dropping packets may adversely affect the latency requirements of some applications Adjust the following parameters to achieve the required latency levels for the queue RED parameters min threshold and max threshold see Modifying RED Parameters on page 3 1 for instructions Queue parameters average queue gain and idle queue loss rate see Modifying a DSQMS Queue in Configuring Differentiated Services for instructions 6 4 314470 15 6 Rev 00 Configuring Differentiated Services Version 15 5 0 0 The following section is new to Chapter 4 Customizing Differentiated Services in Configuring Differentiated Services DSCP Tagging for Router Generated Packets Beginning with Version 15 5 0 0 BayRS supports differentiated services code point DSCP tagging of internally generated router packets such as OSPF Hello packets This feature automatically provides differentiated services queue management system DSQMS queuing for all router generated packets based on the internal mapping between the DSCP tag values and the DSQMS queues This feature enhances quality of service QoS on BayRS routers by marking router generated packets and providing the appropriate queuing treatment to marked traffic flows by the DSQMS This QoS enhancement provides default settings and behaviors for differe

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Multimedia PC Manual de Instuções  Scarica il manuale  スライドハンマプラー用板金フック取扱説明書  NVivo 2.0 and ATLAS.ti 5.0: A Comparative  LED Lighting Fixtures - ADB Lighting Technologies    Sony VGC-LV240J/S Quick Start Manual  ASUS VivoTab CR7493 User's Manual  QIClick User Manual  Samsung HT-BD8200 Manuel de l'utilisateur  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file